[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2007026404A1 - Game machine, game control method, and game system - Google Patents

Game machine, game control method, and game system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007026404A1
WO2007026404A1 PCT/JP2005/015810 JP2005015810W WO2007026404A1 WO 2007026404 A1 WO2007026404 A1 WO 2007026404A1 JP 2005015810 W JP2005015810 W JP 2005015810W WO 2007026404 A1 WO2007026404 A1 WO 2007026404A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
game
special
gaming state
gaming machine
lottery
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2005/015810
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Kazuo Okada
Original Assignee
Aruze Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Aruze Corporation filed Critical Aruze Corporation
Priority to JP2007533077A priority Critical patent/JPWO2007026404A1/en
Priority to PCT/JP2005/015810 priority patent/WO2007026404A1/en
Priority to US11/262,780 priority patent/US20070060280A1/en
Priority to EP06100860A priority patent/EP1760674A3/en
Priority to AU2006200433A priority patent/AU2006200433A1/en
Priority to ZA200601142A priority patent/ZA200601142B/en
Priority to EA200600754A priority patent/EA010953B1/en
Publication of WO2007026404A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007026404A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
    • G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
    • G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
    • G07F17/3244—Payment aspects of a gaming system, e.g. payment schemes, setting payout ratio, bonus or consolation prizes
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
    • G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
    • G07F17/3244—Payment aspects of a gaming system, e.g. payment schemes, setting payout ratio, bonus or consolation prizes
    • G07F17/3258—Cumulative reward schemes, e.g. jackpots
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
    • G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
    • G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
    • G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
    • G07F17/326—Game play aspects of gaming systems
    • G07F17/3267—Game outcomes which determine the course of the subsequent game, e.g. double or quits, free games, higher payouts, different new games

Definitions

  • Game machine Game machine, game control method, and game system
  • the present invention includes a gaming machine such as a slot machine for playing a game using a gaming medium (game value) such as a coin, a gaming control method for the gaming machine, and the gaming machine and a control device.
  • a gaming machine such as a slot machine for playing a game using a gaming medium (game value) such as a coin
  • game value such as a coin
  • a gaming control method for the gaming machine and the gaming machine and a control device.
  • a host computer and a plurality of gaming machines are network-connected, and the host computer controls the generation of bonuses in the gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 2).
  • the host computer accumulates the number of coins inserted in each gaming machine, and accumulates a part of the number of coins inserted in a plurality of gaming machines as a bonus pool.
  • the host computer gives a bonus qualification to gaming machines whose coins have reached a predetermined number.
  • host computer When the value of the bonus pool reaches a predetermined threshold, a command is sent to one gaming machine selected from the gaming machines to which the bonus qualification is granted. A gaming machine that has received the command has a high gear!
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-117053
  • Patent Document 2 US Patent No. 5820459
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and the purpose of the present invention is to cause a player who has consumed a large number of coins and other game media to feel uncomfortable or distrustful of the game.
  • a gaming machine, a control device and a gaming system capable of preventing loss of interest or interest in gaming. Is to provide a stem.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • Means for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination
  • the second special game state is set with a relatively high probability of occurrence. Generate a special gaming state.
  • the second special gaming state is generated.
  • the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • a gaming machine connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine
  • Means for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination
  • Games that are cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine Means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when the number of times reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games;
  • the second special gaming state is always required if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • the player can reliably receive a return for playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • Means for generating a first special state which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination
  • a means for generating a second special game state in which the probability of winning the special role by the lottery is set relatively high When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, a means for generating a second special game state in which the probability of winning the special role by the lottery is set relatively high;
  • the second special game state is set with a relatively high probability of occurrence.
  • Special game Generate a state.
  • the second special gaming state is generated.
  • the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state occurs. In the first special game state that occurs, the player can reliably receive a return for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • It has a receiving means that can accept the input of game media up to a predetermined upper limit for one game
  • the means for generating the second special game state is that when the number of games reaches the set value and the number of game media input for that game is the upper limit, the second special game state is generated. A state is generated.
  • a gaming machine equipped with an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device
  • a program for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
  • the probability of winning the special role by executing the lottery program is relatively A program for generating a second special gaming state set to a high level from the storage device and executing the program.
  • the second special game state is set to have a relatively high probability of occurrence. Generate a special gaming state.
  • the second special gaming state is generated.
  • the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • a gaming machine that includes an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device, and that is connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of the plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
  • the arithmetic processing unit is A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
  • a program for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
  • a program for generating the second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is read from the storage device.
  • the second special gaming state is generated.
  • the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • a gaming machine equipped with an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
  • a second special game state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high is generated.
  • a game machine that executes a process of reading a program from the storage device and executing the program.
  • the second special game state is set to have a relatively high probability of occurrence. Generate a special gaming state.
  • the second special gaming state is generated.
  • the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state occurs. In the first special gaming state that occurs in the game, It is possible to receive a reward for playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • the second A program for generating a special game state is executed.
  • the player can be encouraged to insert the game medium up to the upper limit value, and the facility such as a casino can increase profits.
  • Means for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination
  • the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value.
  • the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value.
  • a player who has consumed a large number of game media can play games. If it is uncomfortable, it can prevent distrust and lose interest in the game.
  • a gaming machine connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the balance of gaming media in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
  • Means for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination
  • the balance of the game media that is cumulatively counted by the control device reaches a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media.
  • the first special gaming state occurs when the balance of the game media counted in the control device is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media.
  • the second special gaming state is set with a relatively high probability of playing.
  • the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value.
  • the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • Sarako the present invention provides the following. (13) a role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
  • Means for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination
  • a means for generating a second special gaming state in which, when it is determined that the balance of gaming media has become equal to or less than a set value, the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by the lottery.
  • the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value.
  • the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special game state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the balance of the game media reaches the set value, the second special game state will be In the first special gaming state that occurs The player can reliably receive a return for playing the game until the balance of the game media reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • It has a receiving means that can accept the input of game media up to a predetermined upper limit for one game
  • the means for generating the second special gaming state is that when the balance of the game media falls below the set value, the number of game media inserted for that game is the upper limit value. 2. It is characterized by generating a special game state.
  • the player can be encouraged to insert the game media up to the upper limit value, and the facility such as a casino can increase profits.
  • a gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device
  • a program for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
  • the lottery program is executed to execute the special role.
  • a game machine for executing a process for reading out and executing a program for generating a second special game state set with a relatively high probability of winning from the storage device.
  • the probability that the first special gaming state occurs is relatively high when the balance of the game media is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media.
  • Set 2nd special gaming state is generated.
  • the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value.
  • the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • the present invention provides the following.
  • a gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device and connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the balance of gaming media in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine.
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device
  • a program for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
  • the balance of the game media that is cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine and the number of game media inserted and paid out in the game is to be compared with the balance of the game media.
  • a program for generating the second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is read from the storage device.
  • Process to be executed A game machine characterized by executing
  • the probability that the first special gaming state will occur is relatively high when the balance of the game media is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media.
  • the set second special gaming state is generated.
  • the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value.
  • the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • a gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device
  • a program for generating a first special gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
  • the balance of the game media is to be compared with the balance of the game media.
  • the second special gaming state is set with a relatively high probability that the first special gaming state will occur.
  • the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value.
  • the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special game state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the balance of the game media reaches the set value, the second special game state will be In the first special gaming state that occurs, the player can reliably receive a return for playing the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
  • the arithmetic processing unit is
  • the number of game media input for that game is the upper limit value of the number of game media input for a single game.
  • (21) a means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when winning a predetermined lottery
  • the means for setting the winning probability of the lottery high, and the fact that the lottery was won when the winning probability is set high is based on the winning probability.
  • the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high according to the number of games played by the player, and the winning confirmation is made until an advantageous gaming state occurs.
  • the state where the rate is set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for having played a game for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • (22) a means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when winning a predetermined lottery
  • the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high, and the winning probability is increased until an advantageous gaming state occurs.
  • the state set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for that. As a result, a player who has consumed a large number of game media may feel distrust if the game is unpleasant, It is possible to prevent loss of interest and interest.
  • (23) a step for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won;
  • the step of setting the winning probability of the lottery to be high and the winning probability is returned to the original when the winning probability is set to be high.
  • a game control method comprising:
  • the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high according to the number of games played by the player, and winning is confirmed until an advantageous gaming state occurs.
  • the state where the rate is set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for having played a game for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • (24) a step for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won;
  • the step of setting the winning probability of the lottery is set high, and the winning probability is returned to the original when the winning probability is set high.
  • a game control method comprising:
  • the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high, and the winning probability is increased until an advantageous gaming state occurs.
  • the state set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for that. As a result, a player who has consumed a large number of game media may feel distrust if the game is unpleasant, It is possible to prevent loss of interest and interest.
  • a control system comprising a gaming machine and a control device
  • the above gaming machine is
  • a gaming system comprising: means for returning the winning probability when the winning is won when the winning probability is set high.
  • the winning probability for the gaming state advantageous to the player is set high according to the number of games played by the player, and winning is confirmed until an advantageous gaming state occurs.
  • the state where the rate is set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for having played a game for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • a gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a control device
  • the above gaming machine is
  • a gaming system comprising means for returning the winning probability.
  • the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high, and the winning probability is increased until an advantageous gaming state occurs.
  • the state set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for that. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling unpleasant if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the gaming system 100 includes a plurality of gaming machines 10 and a control device 200 connected to these gaming machines 10 via a predetermined communication line 101.
  • a gaming system 100 may be built in one gaming facility capable of performing various games such as a casino or a casino.
  • the communication line 101 is not particularly limited, and may be a wired line or a wireless line.
  • the gaming machine 10 is a slot machine.
  • the gaming machine is not limited to a slot machine, but may be a so-called single game machine such as a video slot machine or a video card game machine, for example, a horse racing game or a bingo game. It may be a so-called mass game machine (multi-terminal gamer machine) that plays a game such as a lottery that requires a predetermined time until the result is displayed.
  • the gaming machine 10 coins, bills, or electronic valuable information corresponding to these are used as game media.
  • the game media are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include medals, tokens, electronic money, and tickets.
  • the ticket is not particularly limited. For example, it will be described later. Such as a ticket with a bar code.
  • the control device 200 controls a plurality of gaming machines 10.
  • the control device 200 controls the transition to the return mode in each gaming machine 10.
  • the return mode corresponds to the second special game state in the present invention, and in the return mode, the probability of occurrence of a bonus game is relatively high.
  • the control device 200 may control the reduction rate by controlling the transition to the reduction mode. In this case, the control device 200 may control the return rate of the plurality of gaming machines 10 or may control the return rate of the gaming machines 10 individually.
  • the control device 200 may have a function as a so-called hall server installed in a gaming facility having a plurality of gaming machines 10 or a server that collectively manages a plurality of gaming facilities. Each gaming machine 10 is given a unique identification number, and the control device 200 determines the origin of data sent from each gaming machine 10 based on the identification number. Also, when transmitting data from the control device 200 to the gaming machine 10, the transmission destination can be specified using the identification number.
  • the identification number of the gaming machine corresponds to the identification information of the gaming machine in the present invention.
  • the identification information of the gaming machine is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include letters, symbols, numbers, and combinations thereof.
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the gaming machine 10 includes a cabinet 11, a top box 12 installed on the upper side of the cabinet 11, and a main door 13 provided on the front surface of the cabinet 11. Inside the cabinet 11, three reels 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) are rotatably provided. On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 14, a symbol row consisting of 22 symbols (hereinafter also referred to as symbols) is drawn.
  • a lower image display panel 16 is provided in front of each reel 14 in the main door 13.
  • the lower image display panel 16 includes a transparent liquid crystal panel, and various information about the game, effect images, and the like are displayed during the game.
  • the lower image display panel 16 has a credit amount display section 31 and a payout display section 32. Is set. In the credit amount display section 31, the number of credited coins is displayed as an image. In the payout display section 32, the number of coins paid out when the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line L is a predetermined combination is displayed as an image.
  • the lower image display panel 16 is formed with three display windows 15 (15L, 15C, 15R) whose rear surface can be visually recognized, and the outer peripheral surface of each reel 14 through each display window 15. Three symbols are displayed on the screen.
  • the lower image display panel 16 has one winning line L that horizontally crosses the three display windows 15. The winning line L defines the symbol combination. When the combination of symbols stopped on the pay line L is a predetermined combination, coins corresponding to the combination and the number of coins inserted (BET number) are paid out.
  • a plurality of pay lines L that cross the three display windows 15 horizontally or obliquely are formed, and the number of pay lines L corresponding to the number of coins inserted is determined. If the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated pay line L is a predetermined combination, the number of coins corresponding to the combination may be paid out.
  • a touch panel 69 is provided on the front surface of the lower image display panel 16, so that the player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 69.
  • a control panel 20 including a plurality of buttons 23 to 27 into which instructions relating to game progress are input by a player, and a coin receiving slot 21 for receiving coins into the cabinet 11 And a bill validator 22 is provided.
  • the control panel 20 is provided with a spin button 23, a change button 24, a cashout button 25, a 1-BET button 26, and a maximum BET button 27.
  • the spin button 23 is for inputting an instruction to start the rotation of the reel 14.
  • the change button 24 is used when requesting a change of money from a game facility staff.
  • the cashout button 25 is used to input an instruction to pay out the credited coins to the coin tray 18.
  • the 1-BET button 26 is used to input an instruction to bet one coin among the credited coins on the game.
  • the maximum BET button 27 is used to input an instruction to bet a maximum number of coins (50 in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game among credited coins.
  • the insertion of the game medium means that the game medium is bet on the game.
  • the coin receiving slot 21 when a coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 is directly bet on a game, inserting the coin into the coin receiving slot 21 corresponds to inserting a game medium.
  • the credited coin when a coin is inserted into the coin receiving slot 21, it is credited, and when the 1-BET button 26 or the maximum BET button 27 is operated, the credited coin is transferred to the game.
  • betting a credited coin on a game is equivalent to inserting a game medium.
  • the banknote discriminator 22 recognizes the suitability of banknotes and accepts regular banknotes in the cabinet 11. Note that the bill validator 22 may be configured to be able to read a bar code-added ticket 39 to be described later.
  • a belly glass 34 on which a character of the gaming machine 10 is drawn is provided on the lower front surface of the main door 13, that is, below the control panel 20.
  • An upper image display panel 33 is provided on the front surface of the top box 12.
  • the upper image display panel 33 includes a liquid crystal panel, and displays, for example, an image representing introduction of game contents and explanation of game rules.
  • the top box 12 is provided with a speaker 29.
  • a ticket printer 35 On the lower side of the upper image display panel 33, a ticket printer 35, a card reader 36, a data display 37, and a keypad 38 are provided.
  • the ticket printer 35 prints a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date and time, and an identification number of the gaming machine 10 is encoded on a ticket, and outputs it as a ticket 39 with a bar code.
  • the player reads the ticket 39 with barcode to another gaming machine and plays the game with the gaming machine, or exchanges the ticket 39 with barcode with a bill or the like at a predetermined place in the gaming facility (for example, a cashier in the casino). You can do it.
  • the card reader 36 reads data from a smart card and writes data to the smart card.
  • a smart card is a card possessed by a player. For example, data for identifying a player and data regarding the history of games played by the player are stored. The smart card may store data corresponding to coins, bills or credits. A magnetic stripe card may be adopted instead of the smart card.
  • the data display 37 also serves as a fluorescent display, for example, to display data read by the card reader 36 and data input by the player via the keypad 38.
  • the keypad 38 is used to input instructions and data related to ticket issuance.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a column of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel.
  • Each symbol column is composed of the symbols “JACKPOT 7,” “BLUE 7,” “BELL,” “CHERRY,” “STRA WBERRYJ,“ PLUM, ”“ ORANGE, ”and“ APPLE ”. Yes.
  • “APPLE” is a bonus game trigger (a symbol for shifting to a bonus game). If three “APPLE” are stopped on the winning line L, you can move to the bonus game.
  • the bonus game is equivalent to the first special game state.
  • the bonus game is a free game (a game that can be played a predetermined number of times without betting coins).
  • the first special gaming state is not particularly limited as long as it is a gaming state advantageous to the player.
  • the gaming state advantageous to the player is not particularly limited as long as it is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (a gaming state other than the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state).
  • More gaming media than gaming state A state where game media can be acquired with a higher probability than the normal game state, a state where the number of game media consumed is lower than the normal game state, and the like.
  • examples of the first special gaming state include a free game, a second game, and a mystery bonus.
  • the symbol row drawn on each reel 14 indicates that when the spin button 23 is pressed after the 1 BET button 26 or the maximum BET button 27 is pressed and the game is started, the reel 14 rotates.
  • the display window 15 is scrolled from the upper direction to the lower direction, and is stopped and displayed on the display window 15 as the reel 14 stops rotating after a predetermined time has elapsed.
  • various combinations are determined in advance based on the combination of symbols.
  • a coin corresponding to the combination is paid out.
  • the number is added to the credits owned by the player.
  • a bonus game trigger is established, a bonus game is generated.
  • a return mode flag described later is set to “ON”, the symbol is stopped and displayed as described above, and then the mode is changed to the return mode.
  • the mode is shifted to the return mode after the bonus game is ended.
  • the reduction mode is equivalent to the second special game state.
  • the probability that a bonus game will occur is relatively high (see FIG. 14).
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.
  • the gaming board 50 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a ROM 55 and a boot ROM 52 connected to each other via an internal bus, a card slot 53 corresponding to the memory card 53, and an IC socket corresponding to the GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54. With 54S.
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • ROM 55 ROM 55 and boot ROM 52 connected to each other via an internal bus
  • card slot 53 corresponding to the memory card 53
  • an IC socket corresponding to the GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54.
  • GAL Generic Array Logic
  • the memory card 53 is composed of a nonvolatile memory such as CompactFlash (registered trademark), and stores a game program and a game system program.
  • the game program includes a lottery program.
  • the lottery program is a program for determining the symbols (code numbers corresponding to the symbols) of the reels 14 that are stopped on the winning line L.
  • the lottery program includes symbol weighting data corresponding to a plurality of types of payout rates (for example, 80%, 84%, and 88%).
  • the symbol weight data is the code number of each symbol for each of the three reels 14 (Fig. 3 Reference) and one or a plurality of random values belonging to a predetermined numerical range (0 to 256).
  • the payout rate is determined based on the payout rate setting data output from the GAL 54, and a lottery is performed based on the symbol weighting data corresponding to the payout rate.
  • the card slot 53S is configured so that the memory card 53 can be inserted and removed, and is connected to the mother board 40 by an IDE bus. Therefore, the memory card 53 is removed from the card slot 53S, another game program and a game system program are written to the memory card 53, and the memory card 53 is inserted into the card slot 53S.
  • the type and contents can be changed.
  • the game performed on the gaming machine 10 can be performed.
  • the type and contents can be changed.
  • the game program includes a program related to game progress, a program for generating a first special gaming state, and a program for generating a second special gaming state. Further, the game program includes image data and sound data output during the game, and image data and sound data as notification data.
  • GAL54 is a kind of PLD having an OR fixed array structure.
  • the GAL 54 includes a plurality of input ports and output ports. When predetermined data is input to the input port, the GAL 54 outputs data corresponding to the data from the output port. The data output from this output port is the aforementioned payout rate setting data.
  • the IC socket 54S is configured so that the GAL 54 can be attached and detached, and is connected to the mother board 40 via a PCI bus. Therefore, by removing the GAL54 from the IC socket 54S, rewriting the program stored in the GAL54, and attaching the GAL54 to the IC socket 54S, the payout rate setting data output from the GAL54 can be changed. it can. It is also possible to change the payout rate setting data by exchanging GAL54 for another GAL54.
  • the CPU 51, ROM 55, and boot ROM 52 connected to each other via an internal bus are connected to the mother board 40 via a PCI bus.
  • the PCI bus is connected to the motherboard 40 In addition to transmitting signals to and from the gaming board 50, power is supplied from the mother board 40 to the gaming board 50.
  • the ROM 55 stores country identification information and an authentication program.
  • the boot ROM 52 stores a preliminary authentication program and a program (boot code) for the CPU 51 to start the preliminary authentication program.
  • the authentication program is a program (tamper check program) for authenticating the game program and the game system program.
  • the authentication program follows the procedure (authentication procedure) for confirming and verifying that the game program and game system program subject to the authentication capture process have been tampered with, ie, authenticating the game program and game system program. Is described.
  • the preliminary authentication program is a program for authenticating the above-described authentication program. The preliminary authentication program is described in accordance with a proof that the authentication program to be authenticated has not been tampered with, that is, the authentication program authentication procedure (authentication procedure).
  • the mother board 40 is configured using a commercially available general-purpose mother board (printed wiring board on which basic components of a personal computer are mounted), and includes a main CPU 41, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 42, a RAM ( Random Access Memory) 43 and a communication interface 44.
  • the main CPU 41 is an arithmetic processing device according to the present invention.
  • the ROM 42 is composed of a memory device such as a flash memory, and stores a program such as a BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) executed by the main CPU 41 and permanent data.
  • BIOS Basic Input / Output System
  • the BIOS is executed by the main CPU 41, initialization processing of predetermined peripheral devices is performed, and acquisition processing of the game program and game system program stored in the memory card 53 via the gaming board 50 is started. Is done.
  • the ROM 42 may be a rewritable or impossible content.
  • the RAM 43 stores data and programs used when the main CPU 41 operates. Further, the RAM 43 can store an authentication program, a game program, and a game system program that are read out via the gaming board 50.
  • the RAM 43 is a storage device in the present invention.
  • the RAM 43 is provided with a return mode flag storage area.
  • Reduction mode The lag is a flag that is referenced when selecting whether or not to shift to the return mode as the second special gaming state.
  • the storage area of the reduction mode flag has, for example, a storage area power of a predetermined number of bits, and the reduction mode flag is “ON” or “OFF” depending on the storage contents in the storage area. If the reduction mode flag is set to "ON”, then it always shifts to the reduction mode. Thereafter, when the bonus game is executed in the return mode, the return mode flag is set to “OFF”. Further, the RAM 43 stores data such as the number of credits, the number of coins inserted and paid out in one game.
  • the communication interface 44 is for communicating with the control device 200 via the communication line 101.
  • the main CPU 41 transmits the number of coins inserted and paid out together with the gaming machine identification number of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200.
  • the number of games, the cumulative number of coins to be paid, and the cumulative payout number are stored in association with each gaming machine identification number.
  • a setting value to be compared with the number of games is determined in association with each gaming machine identification number, and the number of times of gaming in a certain gaming machine 10 is set in the gaming machine 10.
  • a reduction command signal is transmitted from the control device 200.
  • the main CPU 41 receives the return command signal via the communication interface 44, the main CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “ON”.
  • a main body PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 60 and a door PCB 80, which will be described later, are connected to the mother board 40 by USB. Further, a power supply unit 45 is connected to the mother board 40. When power is supplied from the power supply unit 45 to the mother board 40, the main CPU 41 of the mother board 40 is activated, and power is supplied to the gaming board 50 via the PCI bus to activate the CPU 51.
  • a power supply unit 45 is connected to the mother board 40.
  • the main body PCB 60 and the door PCB 80 are connected to devices and devices that generate input signals input to the main CPU 41 and devices and devices whose operations are controlled by control signals output from the main CPU 41. ing. Based on the input signal input to the main CPU 41, the main CPU 41 executes the game program and game system program stored in the RAM 43 to perform predetermined arithmetic processing and store the result in the RAM 43.
  • the main body PCB 60 has a lamp 30, sub CPU 61, hopper 66, coin detection unit 67, graphic board 68, speaker 29 as output device, touch panel 69, bill discriminator 22, ticket printer 35, card reader 36, key Switch 38S and data display 37 are connected.
  • the lamp 30 lights up with a predetermined pattern based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41.
  • the sub CPU 61 controls the rotation and stop of the reels 14 (14L, 14C, 14R).
  • the sub CPU 61 is connected to a motor drive circuit 62 including an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) 63 and a driver 64.
  • the FPGA 63 is a programmable electronic circuit such as an LSI and functions as a control circuit for the stepping motor 70.
  • Dryino 64 functions as an amplification circuit for pulses input to the stepping motor 70.
  • a stepping motor 70 (70L, 70C, 70R) that rotates each reel 14 is connected to the motor drive circuit 62.
  • the stepping motor 70 is a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor.
  • the excitation method of the stepping motor is not particularly limited.
  • a two-phase excitation method, a one-phase excitation method, or the like can be adopted.
  • a DC motor may be used instead of the stepping motor.
  • the deviation CPU, DZA conversion, and servo amplifier are connected in order to the sub CPU 61, and the DC motor is connected to the servo amplifier.
  • the rotational position of the DC motor is detected by the rotary encoder, and the current rotational position of the DC motor is supplied as data to the rotary encoder force deviation counter.
  • an index detection circuit 65 and a position detection change circuit 71 are connected to the sub CPU 61.
  • the index detection circuit 65 detects the position of the rotating reel 14 (index to be described later), and can detect the step-out of the reel 14. The control of the rotation and stop of the reel 14 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.
  • the position change detection circuit 71 detects a change in the stop position of the reel 14 after the rotation of the reel 14 is stopped. For example, in the position change detection circuit 71, the stop position is changed so that the player is forced to have a combination of symbols in a winning mode, even though it is not actually a combination of symbols in a winning mode. Stop position of reel 14 Detect changes.
  • the position change detection circuit 71 is configured to detect a change in the stop position of the reel 14 by detecting fins (not shown) attached to the inner portion of the reel 14 at a predetermined interval, for example.
  • the hopper 66 is installed in the cabinet 11 and pays out a predetermined number of coins from the coin payout opening 19 to the coin tray 18 based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41.
  • the coin detector 67 is provided inside the coin payout exit 19 and outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when it detects that a predetermined number of coins have been paid out from the coin payout exit 19. To do.
  • the graphic board 68 controls image display on the upper image display panel 33 and the lower image display panel 16 as an output device based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41.
  • the number of credits stored in the RAM 43 is displayed in the number-of-credit display section 31 of the lower image display panel 16. Further, the payout number display part 31 of the lower image display panel 16 displays the number of coins paid out.
  • the graphic board 68 includes a video display processor (VDP) that generates image data based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data generated by the VDP, and the like. I have. Note that the image data used when generating image data by VDP is included in the game program read from the memory card 53 and stored in the RAM 43.
  • VDP video display processor
  • the bill validator 22 recognizes the suitability of the bill and accepts the regular bill into the cabinet 11.
  • the bill validator 22 accepts a regular bill, it outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 based on the amount of the bill.
  • the main CPU 41 stores the number of credits corresponding to the amount of bills transmitted by the input signal in the RAM 43.
  • the ticket printer 35 Based on the control signal output from the main CPU 41, the ticket printer 35 prints on the ticket a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date and time, and identification number of the gaming machine 10 stored in the RAM 43 are encoded. And output as a ticket 39 with barcode.
  • the card reader 36 reads data from the smart card and transmits it to the main CPU 41, or writes data to the smart card based on a control signal from the main CPU 41.
  • the key switch 38S is provided on the keypad 38. Is operated by the player, a predetermined input signal is output to the main CPU 41.
  • the data display 37 displays data read by the card reader 36 and data input by the player via the keypad 38 based on the control signal output from the main CPU 41.
  • a control panel 20 To the door PCB 80, a control panel 20, a rein table 21S, a coin counter 21C, and a cold cathode tube 81 are connected.
  • the control panel 20 has a spin switch 23S corresponding to the spin button 23, a change switch 24S corresponding to the change button 24, a CASHOUT switch 25S corresponding to the CASHOU T button 25, a 1 BET switch 26S corresponding to the 1 BET button 26, and
  • the maximum BET switch 27S corresponding to the maximum BET button 27 is provided.
  • Each of the switches 23S to 27S outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when the corresponding button 23 to 27 is operated by the player.
  • the coin counter 21C is provided inside the coin receiving slot 21, and identifies whether or not the coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 by the player is appropriate. Coins other than regular coins are discharged from the coin payout exit 19. Further, the coin counter 21C outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when it detects a legitimate coin.
  • the reverter 21S operates based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41, and a coin that is recognized as a regular coin by the coin counter 21C is installed in the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. (Not shown) or hopper 66. That is, when hopper 66 is filled with coins, the regular coins are distributed to the cash box by the reverter 21S. On the other hand, if the hopper 66 is not filled with coins, regular coins are distributed to the hopper 66.
  • the cold cathode tube 81 functions as a knock light installed on the back side of the lower image display panel 16 and the upper image display panel 33 and lights up based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the control device 200 includes a CPU 201 as an arithmetic processing device, a ROM 202, a RAM 203 as a temporary storage device, a communication interface 204, and a hard disk drive 205.
  • the communication interface 204 is connected to the communication interface 44 of each gaming machine 10 via the communication line 101.
  • ROM202 controls the operation of the control device System programs and permanent data are stored.
  • the RAM 203 temporarily stores data received from each gaming machine 10 and data such as calculation results.
  • the hard disk drive 205 stores a gaming history in each gaming machine 10 in association with the gaming machine identification number of each gaming machine 10.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a correspondence table between gaming machine identification numbers and gaming history.
  • Each gaming machine identification number is associated with the number of games as a game history, the cumulative number of coins inserted, the cumulative number of coins paid out, the balance of coins, and the coin return rate.
  • a set value to be compared with the number of games is defined. In the present embodiment, a case where “600” is set as the set value will be described.
  • the value of the set value and the number thereof can be appropriately set without being particularly limited.
  • the setting values may be set for a plurality of gaming machines 10 in a lump without setting the setting values individually for each gaming machine 10.
  • the CPU 201 When the CPU 201 receives from the gaming machine 10 the number of inputs, the number of payouts, and the gaming machine identification number from the gaming machine 10 via the communication interface 204, the CPU 201 updates the gaming history corresponding to the gaming machine identification number. Specifically, 1 is added to the number of games, the number of inputs is added to the cumulative number of inputs, and the number of payouts is added to the cumulative number of payouts. In addition, based on the cumulative number of coins to be paid and the cumulative number of coins to be paid out, the cash balance and return rate are calculated. If the CPU 201 determines that the updated number of games has reached the set value, the CPU 201 transmits a return command signal to the gaming machine 10.
  • FIG. 7 is a chart showing the procedure of the authentication reading process of the game program and game system program by the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 shown in FIG. It is assumed that the memory card 53 is inserted into the card slot 53S of the gaming board 50, and the GAL 54 is attached to the IC socket 54S.
  • step S1-1 and S2-1 when the power switch is turned on (power is turned on) in the power unit 45, the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 are activated (steps S1-1 and S2-1).
  • the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 are activated, separate processes are performed in parallel. That is, in the gaming board 50, the CPU 51 is stored in the boot ROM 52.
  • the pre-authentication program is read out, and the pre-authentication program is falsified in advance according to the read pre-authentication program before loading it into the motherboard 40! /, Na! /, Pre-authentication is performed to confirm and certify (step S2-2).
  • the main CPU 41 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 42 and expands the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS into the RAM 43 (step S1-2). Then, the main CPU 41 executes the BIOS expanded in the RAM 43, and diagnoses and initializes various peripheral devices (step S1-3).
  • the main CPU 41 reads and reads the authentication program stored in the ROM 55.
  • the authentication program is stored in the RAM 43 (step S1-4).
  • the main CPU 41 takes the checksum by the A DDSUM method (standard check function) according to the standard BIOS function of the BIOS and checks whether or not the storage is performed without fail, while the authentication program is stored in the RAM43.
  • a DDSUM method standard check function
  • the main CPU 41 accesses the memory card 53 inserted into the card slot 53S via the IDE bus, and starts from the memory card 53.
  • the game program and the game system program are read out.
  • the main CPU 41 reads out the data constituting the game program and the game system program 4 bytes at a time.
  • the main CPU 41 performs authentication for confirming and verifying that the read game program and game system program have been falsified (step S 1-5). ).
  • the main CPU 41 writes and stores the game program and game system program to be authenticated (authenticated) in the RAM 43 (step S1-6).
  • the main CPU 41 accesses the GAL 54 attached to the IC socket 54S via the PCI bus, reads the payout rate setting data from the GAL 54, and writes and stores it in the RAM 43 (step S1-7).
  • the main CPU 41 reads out the country identification information stored in the ROM 55 of the gaming board 50 via the PCI bus, and performs a process of storing the read country identification information in the RAM 43 (step S100). S1-8). [0123] After performing the processing described above, the main CPU 41 advances the game by sequentially reading and executing the game program and the game system program.
  • the main CPU 41 After the process shown in FIG. 7 is performed, the main CPU 41 performs a game mode selection process.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the game mode selection process.
  • FIGS. 9A to 9B are diagrams showing images displayed on the lower image display panel when the game mode selection process is executed.
  • the main CPU 41 performs processing for displaying an image for requesting the player to select a game mode on the lower image display panel 16 (step S3).
  • the main CPU 41 transmits a drawing command for a game mode selection image to the graphic board 68.
  • VDP extracts the image data from RAM43 and expands it to video RAM to generate one frame of image data, which is output to the lower image display panel 16 To do.
  • an image as shown in FIG. 9A is displayed on the lower image display panel 16.
  • FIG. 9 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a game mode selection image displayed on the lower image display panel.
  • 15 (15L, 15C, 15R) indicates a display window.
  • an image indicating “Select a mode!” is displayed on the upper part of the lower image display panel 16.
  • This image is an image for requesting the player to select a game mode.
  • images indicating “INSURANCE” and “NO INSURANCE” are displayed at the bottom of the lower image display panel 16. These images indicate game mode options.
  • an instruction to select the game mode can be input.
  • the option "INSURANCE" corresponds to the insurance mode.
  • a predetermined number of credits e.g., equivalent to $ 1
  • a corresponding bill or coin may be inserted.
  • Insurance mode is selected
  • the return mode flag is set to “ON” and the mode shifts to the return mode.
  • the probability of the bonus game occurring is relatively high, and the return mode continues until the bonus game occurs.
  • the game can be performed with insurance for covering all or part of the loss caused when the bonus game is not generated for a long time.
  • the option “NO INSUR ANCE” corresponds to the non-insurance mode.
  • the return mode flag is not set to “ON” and the return mode is not entered even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time.
  • step S4 determines whether or not the insurance mode is selected. If it is determined that the insurance mode is selected, the main CPU 41 performs a process of subtracting a predetermined number from the credit power stored in the RAM 43 (step S5). Thereafter, game execution processing in the insurance mode is performed (step S6).
  • an image showing "INSURED" is displayed at the upper left of the lower image display panel 16 in the power insurance mode, which will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 10. .
  • This image is an image indicating that the game mode is the insurance mode.
  • step S7 the main CPU 41 performs a game execution process in the non-insurance mode.
  • This process is substantially the same as the game execution process in the insurance mode (see FIG. 10), except that the process related to the return mode and the process related to counting the number of games are not performed. Therefore, explanation here is omitted.
  • step S6 or S7 the process returns to step S3.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the game execution process in the insurance mode that is called and executed in step S6 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
  • the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a coin has been bet (step S10). In this process, the main CPU 41 outputs the input signal output from the 1- BET switch 26S when the 1- BET button 26 is operated, or the maximum BET switch 27S when the maximum BET button 27 is operated. Received input signal Determine whether or not. If it is determined that no coin is bet, the process returns to step S10.
  • step S10 determines whether a coin has been betted. If it is determined in step S10 that a coin has been betted, the main CPU 41 performs a process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 43 according to the number of coins betted (step Sl l). ). If the number of coins to be bet is larger than the number of credits stored in the RAM 43, the process returns to step S10 without performing the process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 43. In addition, when the number of coins bet exceeds the upper limit value (50 in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game, the number of credits stored in the RAM 43 is subtracted. Without proceeding to step S12
  • the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S12). In this process, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not it has received an input signal output from the spin switch 23S when the spin button 23 is pressed.
  • step S10 If it is determined that the spin button 23 is not turned ON, the process returns to step S10. If the spin button 23 is not turned on (for example, if an instruction to end the game is input without the spin button 23 being turned on), the main CPU 41 cancels the subtraction result in step S11. To do.
  • step S 10 after the coin is bet (step S 10), the process of subtracting the number of credits (step S 12) is performed before determining whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S 12).
  • step S 12 A case where S1 1) is performed will be described.
  • the present invention is not limited to this example.
  • step S13 the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) determines a code number when each reel 14 is stopped by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 43 (storage unit). Thereby, the combination of symbols to be stopped is determined.
  • the main CPU 41 functions as a combination determining means for determining a combination by lottery.
  • one combination is determined from a plurality of types of combinations by determining a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed.
  • a lottery is selected. Therefore, it is possible to determine one combination selected from multiple types of combinations, and then determine the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed based on the above combination.
  • step S 14 the main CPU 41 performs reel rotation control processing.
  • each reel is rotated so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination determined in step S13 is stopped and displayed on the winning line L. It is a process to stop. This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.
  • the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a bonus game trigger has been established, that is, whether or not “APPLE” is stopped and displayed in the display window 15 (step S 15). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) reads the program for executing the bonus game from the RAM 43 (storage unit) and executes bonus game processing (step S 16 ). At this time, the first special gaming state has occurred.
  • the bonus game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.
  • the main CPU 41 functions as a means for generating the first special gaming state.
  • the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the winning combination has been achieved (step S17). If it is determined that a winning combination has been established, the main CPU 41 pays out coins according to the number of inserted coins and the winning combination (step S18).
  • the main CPU 41 When storing coins, the main CPU 41 performs a process of calculating the number of credits stored in the RAM 43. On the other hand, when paying out coins, the main CPU 41 sends a control signal to the hopper 66 to pay out a predetermined number of coins. At that time, the coin detecting unit 67 counts the number of coins paid out from the hopper 66, and transmits a payout completion signal to the main CPU 41 when the counted value reaches a designated number. Thus, the main CPU 41 stops driving the hopper 66 and ends the coin payout process.
  • step SI 6 or SI 8 When the processing of step SI 6 or SI 8 is executed, or when it is determined in step S17 that any combination is not established (when it is determined that the player has lost), the main CPU 41 It is determined whether or not the return mode flag stored in the RAM 43 is set to “ON” (step S19). When it is determined that the reduction mode flag is set to “ON”, the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) reads the program for shifting to the reduction mode from the RAM 43 (storage device), executes the reduction mode process, Transition to reduction mode (step S20). At this time, the second special gaming state has occurred. The reduction mode process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When executing the process of step S20, the main CPU 41 functions as a means for generating the second special gaming state.
  • step S20 When the process of step S20 is executed, or when it is determined in step S19 that the return mode flag force S is not set to "ON", the main CPU 41 executes the bonus game (step S16) or returns. It is determined whether or not a mode transition (step S20) has been performed (step S21).
  • step S22 If it is determined that the bonus game is not executed or the return mode is not shifted, the main CPU 41 executes a counting process (step S22).
  • the counting process is a process performed between the gaming machine 10 and the control device 200. From the gaming machine 10, the number of insertions and withdrawals in one game is transmitted to the control device 200 together with the gaming machine identification number. In the control device 200, the number of games, the cumulative number of inputs, the cumulative number of payouts, etc. are updated for each gaming machine identification number.
  • step S22 the main CPU 41 sets the reduction mode flag to “ON”. The counting process will be described in detail later using FIG. After executing the process of step S22, the main CPU 41 returns the process to step S10, continues the bow I, enters the insurance mode, and executes the game.
  • this subroutine is terminated and the processing returns to FIG. As a result, the player can select again whether to change the game mode to the insurance mode or the power insurance non-insurance mode.
  • FIG. 11 is called and executed in step S13 of the subroutine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a lottery process.
  • This process is a process performed by the main CPU 41 executing the lottery program stored in the RAM 43.
  • the main CPU 41 executes a random number generation program included in the lottery program to set 0 to 255.
  • a random number corresponding to each of the three reels 14 is selected from the numerical value range (step S31).
  • a case where random numbers are generated on a program (a case where so-called software random numbers are used) will be described.
  • a random number generator is provided and random numbers are extracted from the random number generator (so-called hardware tongue L number is used).
  • the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) refers to the symbol weighting data corresponding to the payout rate setting data output from the GAL 54 and stored in the RAM 43 (storage unit), and selects the selected three Based on the random value, the code number (see Fig. 3) of each reel 14 is determined (step S32).
  • the code number of each reel 14 corresponds to the code number of the symbol stopped on the winning line L.
  • the main CPU 41 determines the combination by determining the code number of each reel 14. For example, when the code numbers of the reels 14 are determined as “00”, “00”, and “00”, the main CPU 41 determines the role as “JACKPOT 7”. A reel rotation control process, which will be described later, is performed based on the reel code number. At this time, the main CPU 41 functions as a combination determining means.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of combinations, the possibility of establishment of each combination, and the number of payouts in the present embodiment.
  • the possibility of winning for each combination shown in FIG. 12 is for a case where the payout rate other than the bonus game is 88%.
  • the possibility of establishment shown in the figure indicates the possibility that the combination will be established when the code number of each reel 14 is determined based on three random numbers with reference to the symbol weighting data. It is. In other words, a random number value is associated with each role.
  • the probability of establishing a bonus game trigger is 0.5%. If you win the bonus game trigger, three “APPLE” symbols will be stopped on the winning line and a bonus game will occur. In the bonus game, the number of free games determined by lottery Execute.
  • Three “7” symbols are displayed on the winning line L, and 30 coins are paid out per coin inserted.
  • the number of payouts is set higher as the role is less likely to be established. However, if a combination of symbols that cannot be any combination of the combinations shown in FIG. 12 is stopped, it is a loss and no coins are paid out.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation control process that is called and executed in step S 15 of the subroutine shown in FIG. This process is a process performed between the main CPU 41 and the sub CPU 61.
  • the main CPU 41 transmits a start signal for starting reel rotation to the sub CPU 61 (step S40).
  • the sub CPU 61 performs reel rotation processing (step S51).
  • the sub CPU 61 supplies a pulse to the motor drive circuit 62.
  • the pulse output from the sub CPU 61 is amplified by the dry-coil 64 and supplied to each stepping motor 70 (70L, 70C, 70R).
  • each stepping motor 70 rotates and each reel 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) rotates accordingly.
  • the stepping motor 70 of the 1-2 phase excitation method has a step angle of 0.9 ° and a step force of 00 per revolution. Therefore, when 400 nores are supplied to the stepping motor 70, the reel 14 makes one rotation.
  • the sub CPU 206 supplies a low frequency pulse to the motor drive circuit 62, and gradually increases the frequency of the noise. Along with this, the rotation speed of the reel 14 increases. When a predetermined time elapses, the pulse frequency is made constant. As a result, the reel 14 rotates at a constant speed.
  • FIGS. 14A to 14D are side views for explaining the rotation operation of the reel 14.
  • the side surface of the reel 14 is provided with a semicircular metal plate 14a.
  • the metal plate 14a rotates together with the reel 14.
  • 22 symbols are provided on the peripheral surface of the reel 14.
  • Out of the 22 symbols drawn on the circumference of the reel 14, 3 symbol power is approved through the display window 15 formed in front of the reel 14. It becomes ability.
  • a thick arrow indicates the rotation direction of the reel 14.
  • a proximity sensor 65a is provided on the side of the reel.
  • the proximity sensor 65a is for detecting the metal plate 14a.
  • the proximity sensor 65a does not move or rotate even when the reel 14 rotates.
  • FIG. 14 (a) shows the position (hereinafter also referred to as position A) of the metal plate 14a when the proximity sensor 65a starts detecting the metal plate 14a.
  • position A shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter also referred to as position A) when the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a.
  • position B shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter also referred to as position B) when the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a.
  • FIG. 14 (c) shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter also referred to as position C) when the metal plate 14a is no longer detected by the proximity sensor 65a.
  • FIG. 14 (d) shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter, also referred to as position D) when the metal plate 14a is not detected by the proximity sensor 65a.
  • position D the position of the metal plate 14a
  • the position of the metal plate 14a returns to the position A.
  • the position of the metal plate 14a changes in the order of position A, position B, position C, position D, position A,.
  • the proximity sensor 65a constitutes the index detection circuit 65 (see Fig. 3). If the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a is "High”, the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a! /, !, and the state is "Low", the metal plate 14a is positioned. When A ⁇ Position B ⁇ Position C, the state of the index detection circuit 65 is “High”, and when the metal plate 14a is in position C ⁇ Position D ⁇ Position A, the state of the index detection circuit 65 is “Low”. It is.
  • the sub CPU 61 uses the rising edge from “Low” to “High” as the index (origin) 1 and the falling edge from “High” to “Low” as the index (origin) 2. recognize.
  • step S41 After transmitting the start signal to the sub CPU 61 in step S40, the main CPU 40 executes the effect at the time of reel rotation (step S41).
  • This process is a lottery process ( Figure 10). In this process, the image is displayed on the lower image display panel 16 and the sound is output from the speaker 29 over a period (for example, 3 seconds) determined according to the result of step S13). .
  • the main CPU 40 determines whether or not it is time to instruct to stop the rotation of the reel 14 (step S42).
  • the timing for instructing the stop of the rotation of the reel 14 is the timing before the minimum necessary time for stopping the rotation of the reel 14 from the time when the effect at the time of the reel rotation ends.
  • the minimum time required to stop the rotation of the reel 14 is determined in advance.
  • step S42 If it is determined in step S42 that it is not the timing to instruct to stop the rotation of the reel 14, the process returns to step S42, and the effect at the time of reel rotation is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42 that it is the timing to instruct to stop the rotation of the reel 14, the main CPU 41 transmits the code number of the reel stored in the RAM 43 to the sub CPU 61 (step S43). When the sub CPU 61 receives the reel code number from the main CPU 41, the sub CPU 61 sets the code number based on the correspondence table between the number of steps stored in the ROM (not shown) of the sub CPU 61 and the code number. Converted to the reel stop position (number of steps) from the index (step S52).
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and code numbers. Each code number is associated with an index and the number of steps.
  • Each code number corresponds to the symbol drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the reel 14 (see FIG. 3), and the symbols with code numbers “00” to “10” correspond to index 1. . Symbols with code numbers “11” to “21” correspond to index 2.
  • the number of steps in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 15 is the number of steps based on index 1. For example, if the code number is “08”, steps 1 through 145 are the reel stop positions. If the code number is “12”, it is the stop position of the index force 1 to 218 step force rail.
  • step S53 the sub CPU 61 executes a reel stop process.
  • the sub CPU 61 makes a transition from “Low” to “High” in the index detection circuit 65.
  • the rise (index 1) is detected for each reel 14, and at the timing when index 1 is detected, a pulse corresponding to the number of steps converted from the code number in step S52 is sent to the motor drive circuit 65. Then, supply of pulses is stopped.
  • step S52 For example, if it is determined in step S52 that the stop position force of the reel is between index 1 and 145 steps, the sub CPU 61 sends 1 45 pulses to the motor drive circuit 65 at the timing when index 1 is detected. And then the pulse supply is stopped. If it is determined in step S52 that the stop position force of the reel is 218 steps from index 1, the sub CPU 61 supplies 218 pulses to the motor drive circuit 65 at the timing when index 1 is detected. . As a result, the reel 14 force stops according to the code number determined in step S32 in FIG. 11, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S32 in FIG. Is displayed. On the other hand, the main CPU 41 ends the effect at the time of reel rotation. After finishing the processes of steps S44 and S53, this process is finished.
  • step S43 if the index corresponding to the code number transmitted in step S43 is different from the index detected by the index detection circuit 65 when the reel 14 stops rotating, the reel 14 is out of step. Therefore, the main CPU 41 performs processing such as displaying an error message on the lower image display panel 16 and interrupts the game.
  • index 1 is detected by the index detection circuit 65 when the reel 14L stops rotating even though the reel 14L is stopped with code No. 12 corresponding to index 2. Interrupt the game.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a bonus game process subroutine that is called and executed in step S16 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
  • the main CPU 41 selects one of the 10 to 25 games based on the random number value obtained by executing the random number generation program included in the lottery program stored in the RAM 43. Determine (step S60).
  • the main CPU 41 stores the determined number of bonus games in the RAM 43 as data.
  • step S61 the main CPU 41 performs a lottery process (step S61) and a reel rotation control process (step S63).
  • step S61 is substantially the same as the process described using FIG. It is.
  • step S63 is substantially the same process as described with reference to FIG. Since these processes have already been described, description thereof is omitted here.
  • the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a bonus game trigger is established, that is, whether or not “APPLE” is stopped and displayed in the display window 15 (step S64). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the bonus game repeat count t is newly determined by lottery (step S65), and the determined repeat count t is the number of games in the current bonus game. It is added to T (step S66). As a result, if the bonus game is won during the bonus game, the remaining number of bonus games is increased. To be specific, for example, if you first transition to 20 bonus games and you win 17 bonus games at the 12th bonus game, then 25 (20 1 12 + 17 Times) bonus game.
  • step S67 determines whether or not a winning combination has been established.
  • step S68 pays out coins according to the number of inserted coins and the winning combination. Since this process is the same as the process of step S 18 and has already been described, the description thereof is omitted here.
  • step S66 When the processing of step S66 or step S68 is executed, or when it is determined that V, V, and the shift role are also established in step S67 (when it is determined that it is lost)
  • the main CPU 61 reads the game number T of the bonus game stored in the RAM 43, and subtracts 1 from the value of the read game number T. Then, the subtracted game number T is stored again in the RAM 43 (step S69).
  • the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the bonus game number T power has reached the number determined in step S60 (step S70). Specifically, the number of games stored in the RAM 43 is determined based on whether or not the power T becomes 0. If the number of games is not T power ⁇ , that is, the number of times the bonus game is executed is determined by step S60. If it is determined that it has reached, the process returns to step S61 and the above-described process is repeated. On the other hand, if the number of games is T power O, that is, if it is determined that the number of times determined in step S60 has been reached, a game number reset signal is transmitted to the control device 200 (step S71). Exit the subroutine.
  • the game number reset signal is used to identify the gaming machine identification information of the gaming machine 10.
  • the CPU 201 of the control device 200 receives the game count reset signal, the CPU 201 of the control device 200 sets the game count stored in the hard disk drive 205 in association with the gaming machine identification information included in the game count reset signal to 0. Reset to.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the reduction mode process that is called and executed in step S20 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
  • step S76 to step S84 is substantially the same processing as described with reference to FIG. Since these processes have already been described, description thereof is omitted here.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of winning combinations, the possibility of establishment of each winning combination, and the number of payouts in the lottery process in the return mode.
  • the possibility of establishing the bonus game trigger is higher than the possibility of establishing the bonus game trigger shown in FIG.
  • the case where the winning combination other than the bonus game trigger is established is described in the same manner as in FIG. 12, but for example, the winning possibility other than the bonus game trigger is relatively higher than that in FIG. It is good to do.
  • step S82 or S84 When the process of step S82 or S84 is executed, or when it is determined in step S83 that no combination is established (when it is determined that the game is lost), the main CPU 41 It is determined whether or not execution has been performed (step S85).
  • step S76 If it is determined that the bonus game is not being executed, the main CPU 41 returns the process to step S76. On the other hand, when determining that the bonus game is not being executed, the main CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “OFF” (step S86). In the process of step S86, the main CPU 41 functions as a means for ending the second special gaming state when a special combination is won by lottery while the second special gaming state is occurring. Then, this subroutine is terminated.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the counting process that is called and executed in step S23 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
  • This process is performed between the main CPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 and the CPU 201 of the control device 200. Process. Here, it is assumed that the set value “600” is set for each of the plurality of gaming machines 10 (see FIG. 6).
  • the main CPU 41 transmits the number of coins inserted and paid out stored in the RAM 43 together with the gaming machine identification number to the control device 200 via the communication line 101 via the communication interface 44 (step S90). .
  • the number of coins inserted and paid out transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 is that in the game at that time.
  • step S90 each time a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) power game is performed, the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in the RAM 43 (storage unit) is transmitted to the control unit 200 via the communication line 101. It is processing to transmit to.
  • the main CPU 41 functions as means for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 via the communication line 101.
  • the CPU 201 of the control device 200 receives the number of coins inserted and paid out and the gaming machine identification number from the gaming machine 10 via the communication line 101 by the interface circuit 204, Of the number of games, the cumulative number of inputs, and the cumulative number of payouts stored in association with each gaming machine identification number on the hard disk drive 205 (see FIG. 6), the number is associated with the received gaming machine identification number.
  • the number of games, the cumulative input number, and the cumulative payout number are updated (step S100).
  • the CPU 201 determines whether or not the updated number of games has reached the set value (step S 101). If it is determined that the updated number of games has not reached the set value, this subroutine is terminated.
  • step S101 determines whether the updated number of games has reached the set value. If it is determined in step S101 that the updated number of games has reached the set value, the CPU 201 sends a return command signal to the interface circuit 204 via the communication line 101. Is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 that has reached the set value (step S103). Thereafter, the CPU 201 resets the number of games stored in the hard disk drive 205 in association with the gaming machine identification number of the gaming machine 10 to 0 (step S104). Then, this process ends.
  • step S91 When the main CPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 receives the return command signal transmitted from the control device 200 in step S103, the return mode flag is set to "ON" (step S91).
  • the process in step S91 is performed when the number of games cumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine 10 reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games. This is a process of receiving a command signal transmitted from.
  • the main CPU 41 functions as a means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200. Thereafter, this process is terminated.
  • the present invention is not limited to this example.
  • the number of games reaches a set value
  • the second special game state It is good also as generating (it transfers to reduction
  • the second special gaming state is to be generated when the number of game media inserted is the upper limit
  • the game media will be inserted up to the upper limit when the number of games reaches the set value.
  • the second special game state may be generated if the number of game media inserted for that game is the upper limit. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the second special gaming state only by using a small number of game media in each game and consuming a small number of game media in total.
  • the gaming machine 10 includes the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing device) and the RAM 43 (storage device), and accumulates the number of games in each of the plurality of gaming machines 10 for each gaming machine 10.
  • the main CPU 41 executes a lottery program stored in the RAM 43 to perform a plurality of predetermined combinations of roles. Processing to determine one combination to be selected (see Fig. 11), and when the determined combination is a special combination "Bonus Game Trigger", a bonus game (first special game state) is generated Processing for reading the program for reading from the RAM 43 (see FIG. 16) and each time a game is played, the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in the RAM 43 is transmitted to the control device 200 via the communication line 101.
  • the gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine 10 connected via a communication line 101 to a control device 200 that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of the plurality of gaming machines 10 for each gaming machine 10. And a means for determining a combination by lottery (for example, the main CPU 41), and a means for generating a bonus game (first special gaming state) when the determined combination is a special combination "bonus game trigger" (for example, Main CPU 41), means for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 via the communication line 101 every time a game is played (for example, the main CPU 41), and the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine A means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the number of games cumulatively counted by 200 reaches a set value (for example, the main CPU 41), and the lottery based on the command signal.
  • a means for determining a combination by lottery for example, the main CPU 41
  • the bonus game trigger is won and the bonus game is played.
  • a return mode with a relatively high probability of occurrence is generated, and the return mode is continued until a bonus game is generated.
  • the gaming machine 10 is connected to the control device 200 via the communication line 101, and the control device 200 counts the number of games in the gaming machine 10 and the force at which the number of games reaches the set value. A determination of whether or not is made.
  • the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to use a network and may be a stand-alone.
  • the stand-alone gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine 10 that includes a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) and a RAM 43 (storage device), and the main CPU 41 is stored in the RAM 43.
  • a process for determining one combination selected from a plurality of types of predetermined combinations, and when the determined combination is a special combination “bonus game trigger” A process for reading out and executing a program for generating a game (first special game state) from the RAM 43, a process for cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is performed, and the number of games are the number of games.
  • This gaming machine 10 includes a role determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a role by lottery, and a means for generating a bonus game when the determined role is a special bonus "bonus game trigger" (for example, main CPU 41), means for cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is played (for example, main CPU 41), means for determining whether or not the number of games has reached a set value (for example, main CPU 41), When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, the transition to the return mode in which the probability of winning the special role “Bonus Game Trigger” is set relatively high by the lottery (the second special (E.g., generation of gaming state) (for example, main CPU 41) When the “bonus game trigger” is won, a means (for example, the main CPU 41) for ending the return mode is provided!
  • a role determining means for example, the main CPU 41
  • a means for generating a bonus game when the determined role is a special bonus "bonus game trigger" for
  • transition to the return mode (generation of the second special gaming state) is performed.
  • the gaming machine 10 of the present invention may be one in which a transition to a return mode (generation of a second special gaming state) is performed when the balance of coins reaches a set value.
  • Such a gaming machine 10 includes a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) and a RAM 43 (storage device), and controls to count the balance of coins in a plurality of gaming machines 10 cumulatively for each gaming machine 10.
  • a gaming machine 10 connected to the device 200 via the communication line 101, and the main CPU 41 is selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 43.
  • the probability of winning the special role “bonus game trigger” by receiving the command signal transmitted from the control device 200 and executing the lottery program based on the command signal is determined.
  • the process of ending the return mode is executed.
  • This gaming machine 10 has a role determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a role by lottery, and a bonus game (first special game) when the determined role is a special role "bonus game trigger”.
  • a game state e.g., the main CPU 41
  • the balance of coins in the game at that time is connected to the identification information of the gaming machine 10 via the communication line 101.
  • the balance of coins cumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the means for transmitting to the control device 200 (for example, the main CPU 41), the identification information of the gaming machine 10 and the balance of coins at that time is set.
  • Means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the value is reached for example, the main CPU 41
  • the probability of winning the special combination “bonus game trigger” by the lottery based on the command signal Is set to a relatively high return mode (occurrence of the second special gaming state) for example, the main CPU 41
  • the special combination ⁇ bonus game '' by the lottery during the occurrence of the return mode.
  • a means for example, main CPU 41 for ending the return mode when the “trigger” is won.
  • the probability that a bonus game will occur is set relatively high when the balance of the game media falls below a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. Shift to the specified return mode and continue the return mode until a bonus game occurs.
  • the gaming machine 10 described above is connected to the control device 200 via the communication line 101, and the control device 200 counts the coin balance in the gaming machine 10 and the force at which the coin balance reaches the set value. A determination of whether or not is made.
  • the gaming machine 10 may not necessarily be a stand-alone device that uses a network.
  • Such a gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine 10 having a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing device) and a RAM 43 (storage device), and the main CPU 41 uses a lottery program stored in the RAM 43.
  • a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of types of predetermined combinations, and when the determined combination is a special combination “bonus game trigger” A process for reading out and executing a program for generating a bonus game (first special gaming state) from the RAM 43, a process for cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played, and a balance of game media
  • the program for executing the second special gaming state is read from the RAM 43 and executed, and the special combination “bonus game trigger” is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the reduction mode.
  • a gaming machine 10 that, when selected, executes a process for ending the return mode.
  • This gaming machine 10 has a role determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a role by a lottery and a bonus game (first special game) when the determined role is a special role "bonus game trigger”.
  • Means for generating (game state) for example, the main CPU 41
  • Means for cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played for example, the main CPU 41
  • setting values are determined in stages.
  • a means for selecting from a plurality of candidate values for example, the main CPU 41
  • a means for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium is below a set value for example, the main CPU 41
  • a balance for the game medium are set.
  • the setting value of all the gaming machines 10 is set to “600”.
  • the set value may be different for each gaming machine 10.
  • the set value may be selected from a plurality of candidate values that are determined in stages.
  • the second special gaming state continues until the first special gaming state occurs.
  • the second special gaming state is not limited to this example as long as it continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
  • the predetermined condition that triggers the end of the reduction mode includes, for example, the elapse of a predetermined period and the establishment of a predetermined number of times for a predetermined role.
  • the second special game state is not particularly limited as long as it is a game state advantageous to the player.
  • the gaming state advantageous to the player is not particularly limited as long as it is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (a gaming state other than the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state). State that can acquire more game media than the normal game state, state that can acquire game media with higher probability than normal game state, state that consumes less game media than normal game state, etc. Can do.
  • the second special gaming state may include a free game, a second game, a mystery bonus, and the like.
  • the return mode when the return mode is set to "ON", a case has been described in which a transition is made to a return mode that is not triggered by the establishment of some condition.
  • the present invention is not limited to this example.
  • the mode may be shifted to the reduction mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
  • the predetermined conditions that trigger the transition to the return mode are not particularly limited. For example, a bonus trigger is established, symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, etc. Can be mentioned.
  • the present invention is not limited to this example.
  • a combination of symbols indicating the transition to the return mode may be set in advance, and the symbols may be stopped and displayed in the combination, and then the mode may be shifted to the return mode.
  • the predetermined timing for example, the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed
  • the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed from when the variable display of the symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and processed based on the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed.
  • the number of games may be counted. It is possible to use the above-mentioned timing for counting the balance of game media.
  • the transition to the reduction mode (Fig. 10, step S20) is performed before the special mode flag is set to "ON”.
  • the role “Bonus Game Trigger” is established (FIG. 10, step S15)
  • the bonus game is generated (FIG. 10, step S16)
  • the game machine 10 that makes the transition to the return mode is further connected.
  • the gaming machine according to the present embodiment if a special combination is established between the time when the number of games reaches the set value and the occurrence of the second special gaming state, The first special gaming state based on the first special gaming state is generated, and the second special gaming state is further generated.
  • the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, if a special combination is established between the time when the number of games reaches a set value and the time when the second special game state is generated, only the first special game state may be generated.
  • the player can always benefit from the first special game state or the second special game state when playing until the number of games reaches the set value.
  • the above form is also one form of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another example of a subroutine for game execution processing.
  • step S15 After executing the processing of step S10 to step S14, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a bonus game trigger is established (step S15), and the bonus game trigger is established. If it is determined that the bonus game has been made, bonus game processing is executed (step S16). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reduction mode flag is set to “ON” (step S25). If the reduction mode flag is set to “ON”, the reduction mode flag is set to “OFF”. (Step S26). Then, the process of step S21 is performed, and this subroutine is terminated.
  • the other processes are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 10, and a description thereof is omitted here.
  • the subroutine shown in FIG. 20 As in the subroutine shown in FIG.
  • step S10 after the coin is bet (step S10), it is determined whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S12). If it is determined that the spin button 23 has been turned on (step S12: YES), the process of subtracting the number of credits (step SI 1) should be performed.
  • step S22 when the number of games reaches 600 times and the return mode flag is established, a bonus game is generated in the 601st game (step S15), but a bonus game is generated (step S16). Is not transferred (steps S 25 and S 26). On the other hand, when the bonus game trigger is not established in the 601st game, a transition to the return mode is performed (steps S19 and S20).
  • the second special game state is generated according to the balance of the game media
  • the same form as described above can be adopted.
  • only the first special game state is generated. It may be possible to generate only the second special gaming state or the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state 1 depending on the gaming situation etc. That's it.
  • the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but only specific examples are illustrated, and the specific configuration of each means and the like that are not particularly limited to the present invention can be appropriately changed in design. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not a thing.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a row of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a correspondence table between gaming machine identification numbers and gaming history.
  • FIG. 7 is a chart showing a procedure of authentication reading processing of the game program and game system program by the mother board and gaming board shown in FIG. 4.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of game mode selection processing.
  • FIG. 9] (a) to (b) are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the lower image display panel when the game mode selection process is executed.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of game execution processing.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a lottery processing subroutine.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of combinations, the possibility of establishment of each combination, and the number of payouts in the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for reel rotation control processing.
  • FIG. 14] (a) to (d) are side views for explaining the reel rotation operation.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and a code number.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of bonus game processing.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of reduction mode processing.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of winning combinations, the possibility of establishment of each winning combination, and the number of payouts in the lottery process in the return mode.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a counting process subroutine.
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another example of the game execution processing subroutine.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Slot Machines And Peripheral Devices (AREA)
  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)

Abstract

A game machine not causing the player who has wasted many coins to have a discomfort feeling about games and a sense of mistrust and to lose the interest in games. The game machine is characterized by comprising winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination by drawing, means for bringing about a first special game mode which is advantageous to the player when the determined winning combination is a special winning combination, and means for bringing about a second special game mode in which the probability of drawing a special winning combination is relatively set high when the number of games played and cumulatively counted each time the player plays reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games played.

Description

明 細 書  Specification
遊技機、遊技制御方法及び遊技システム  Game machine, game control method, and game system
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、コイン等の遊技媒体 (遊技価値)を用いて遊技を行うスロットマシン等の遊 技機、該遊技機に係る遊技制御方法、及び、該遊技機と制御装置とを備えた遊技シ ステムに関する。  [0001] The present invention includes a gaming machine such as a slot machine for playing a game using a gaming medium (game value) such as a coin, a gaming control method for the gaming machine, and the gaming machine and a control device. Related to a game system.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 従来から、スロットマシン等の遊技機が設置された施設においては、コインや現金等 の各種の遊技媒体を遊技機に投入することにより、遊技を行うことができる。そして、 各遊技機は、遊技の進行によって発生する入賞状態 (遊技の結果）によって配当を 払い出すようになつている。  Conventionally, in a facility where a gaming machine such as a slot machine is installed, it is possible to play a game by inserting various gaming media such as coins and cash into the gaming machine. Each gaming machine pays out a payout according to a winning state (game result) generated by the progress of the game.
[0003] 複数のスロットマシンを配置したカジノでは、各スロットマシンで消費されたクレジット の一部を保留しておき、その保留額がある金額に達した場合に、いずれかのスロット マシンに対して、通常の当たりでは払い出されないような多額の払出しを行なう所謂「 ジャックポット」と呼ばれるものがある（例えば、特許文献 1参照）。このようなスロットマ シンでは、通常の場合、それぞれ設定された確率で当たりが発生するようになってお り、遊技者は当該当たりが発生することを期待してゲームを進める。そして、スロットマ シンに設定された当該確率を基にした通常の当たりの抽選とは別の抽選により、ある タイミングでいずれかのスロットマシンにジャックポット当たりが発生することになる。ま た、「ジャックポット」時における払出額を多額にするため、一般に、複数のカジノ間が ネットワークで結ばれる。  [0003] In a casino in which a plurality of slot machines are arranged, a part of the credits consumed in each slot machine is reserved, and when the reserved amount reaches a certain amount, There is a so-called “jackpot” that pays out a large amount that is not paid out in a normal win (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a slot machine, normally, a win is generated with a set probability, and the player advances the game in the hope that the win will occur. Then, by a lottery different from the normal winning lottery based on the probability set in the slot machine, a jackpot win occurs in any slot machine at a certain timing. Also, in order to increase the payout amount at the time of “jackpot”, generally, a plurality of casinos are connected by a network.
[0004] また、ホストコンピュータと複数の遊技機とがネットワーク接続されたシステムであって 、遊技機におけるボーナスの発生をホストコンピュータが制御するシステムが存在す る（例えば、特許文献 2参照)。このシステムにおいて、ホストコンピュータは、各遊技 機におけるコイン投入数を積算するとともに、複数の遊技機におけるコイン投入数の 一部をボーナスプールとして積算する。また、ホストコンピュータは、コイン投入数が 所定数に達した遊技機に対してボーナス資格を付与する。そして、ホストコンピュータ は、ボーナスプールの値が所定の閾値に達したとき、ボーナス資格を付与した遊技 機の中から選ばれる 1の遊技機に対してコマンドを送信する。コマンドを受信した遊 技機では、ギヤンブノレ性の高!、ボーナスゲームが行われる。 [0004] In addition, there is a system in which a host computer and a plurality of gaming machines are network-connected, and the host computer controls the generation of bonuses in the gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 2). In this system, the host computer accumulates the number of coins inserted in each gaming machine, and accumulates a part of the number of coins inserted in a plurality of gaming machines as a bonus pool. In addition, the host computer gives a bonus qualification to gaming machines whose coins have reached a predetermined number. And host computer When the value of the bonus pool reaches a predetermined threshold, a command is sent to one gaming machine selected from the gaming machines to which the bonus qualification is granted. A gaming machine that has received the command has a high gear!
[0005] 特許文献 1：特開 2003 - 117053号公報  [0005] Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-117053
特許文献 2 :米国特許第 5820459号明細書  Patent Document 2: US Patent No. 5820459
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0006] しかしながら、特許文献 1に記載のスロットマシンにお!、て「ジャックポット」の利益を享 受することができるのは、抽選に当選した遊技機で遊技を行っている遊技者である。 そのため、多数のコインを消費した遊技者力 全く「ジャックポット」の利益を享受する ことができず、遊技を開始したば力りの遊技者が「ジャックポット」の利益を享受する場 合があった。 [0006] However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, it is a player who is playing a game using the game machine that has won the lottery! . Therefore, the player who consumed a large number of coins cannot enjoy the benefits of the “jackpot” at all, and the player who has just started playing can enjoy the benefits of the “jackpot”. It was.
[0007] また、特許文献 2に記載のシステムでも、ボーナスゲームの利益を享受する機会が付 与されるのは、コイン投入数が所定数に達した遊技機のいずれかである。必ずしも、 ボーナスゲームの利益を享受する機会が、多数のコインを消費した遊技者に付与さ れるとは限らない。そのため、特許文献 2に記載のシステムにおいても、特許文献 1に 記載のスロットマシンと同様に、多数のコインを消費した遊技者力 ボーナスゲームの 利益を享受することができず、遊技を開始したば力りの遊技者がボーナスゲームの利 益を享受する場合があった。  [0007] Also, in the system described in Patent Document 2, an opportunity to enjoy the benefits of the bonus game is given to any gaming machine in which the number of coins inserted reaches a predetermined number. An opportunity to enjoy the benefits of a bonus game is not necessarily given to a player who has consumed a large number of coins. For this reason, even in the system described in Patent Document 2, as with the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, it is not possible to enjoy the benefits of a player-power bonus game that consumed a large number of coins. In some cases, powerful players could benefit from bonus games.
[0008] また、特許文献 2に記載のシステムでは、複数の遊技機におけるコイン投入数の一部 がボーナスプールとして積算される。そのため、システム内の遊技機の稼働率が低い 場合等には、或る遊技者が多数のコインを消費してもボーナスプールの値が所定の 閾値に到達せず、ボーナスゲームの利益を享受することができな 、場合があった。  [0008] Further, in the system described in Patent Document 2, a part of the number of coins inserted in a plurality of gaming machines is accumulated as a bonus pool. Therefore, when the operating rate of gaming machines in the system is low, even if a certain player consumes a large number of coins, the value of the bonus pool does not reach the predetermined threshold value, and the benefit of the bonus game is enjoyed. There was a case that could not.
[0009] 上述したような事態が生じると、多数のコインを消費した遊技者力 遊技に対して不 快感や不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりするおそれがある。  [0009] When the situation as described above occurs, there is a risk that discomfort and distrust may be raised for the player-powered game that has consumed a large number of coins, or the interest and interest in the game may be lost.
[0010] 本発明は、上述した課題に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、多数のコイン等 の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技 に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止し得る遊技機、制御装置及び遊技シ ステムを提供することにある。 [0010] The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and the purpose of the present invention is to cause a player who has consumed a large number of coins and other game media to feel uncomfortable or distrustful of the game. A gaming machine, a control device and a gaming system capable of preventing loss of interest or interest in gaming. Is to provide a stem.
課題を解決するための手段  Means for solving the problem
[0011] 上述した課題を解決するために、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention provides the following.
(1)抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  (1) a role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象 となる設定値に達したとき、上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的 に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と  When the number of games counted cumulatively every time a game is played reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the probability of winning the special combination is set relatively high by the lottery. Means for generating a second special gaming state;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[0012] (1)の発明によれば、遊技回数が上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達した とき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状 態を発生させる。 [0012] According to the invention of (1), when the number of games reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the second special game state is set with a relatively high probability of occurrence. Generate a special gaming state.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2特別遊 技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、遊技回 数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることができる 。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state is generated. However, in the first special game state that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0013] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0013] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(2)複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技回数を遊技機ごとに累積的に計数する制御 装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機であって、  (2) A gaming machine connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  A role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、上記通信回線を介して遊技機の識別情報を上記制御装置 に送信する手段と、  Means for transmitting identification information of a gaming machine to the control device via the communication line each time a game is played;
上記遊技機の識別情報に基づいて上記制御装置によって累積的に計数される遊技 回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達したときに上記制御装置から 送信される指令信号を受信する手段と、 Games that are cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine Means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when the number of times reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games;
上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的 に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と  Based on the command signal, means for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special combination by the lottery is set relatively high;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[0014] (2)の発明によれば、制御装置において計数される遊技回数が上記遊技回数との比 較対象となる設定値に達したとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高 く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。 [0014] According to the invention of (2), when the number of games counted in the control device reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the probability that the first special gaming state will occur is relative. The second special game state set to high is generated.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、必ず、第 2特 別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、遊 技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることが できる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不 信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができ る。  Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second special gaming state is always required if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value. In the first special game state in which the game occurs, the player can reliably receive a return for playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0015] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0015] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(3)抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  (3) a role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special state, which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技回数を累積的に計数する手段と、  Means for cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is played;
上記遊技回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象として定められた設定値に達している か否かを判定する手段と、  Means for determining whether or not the number of games has reached a set value determined as a comparison target with the number of games;
上記遊技回数が上記設定値に達していると判定されたとき、上記抽選により上記特 別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手 段と  When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, a means for generating a second special game state in which the probability of winning the special role by the lottery is set relatively high;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[0016] (3)の発明によれば、遊技回数が上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達した とき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状 態を発生させる。 [0016] According to the invention of (3), when the number of games reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the second special game state is set with a relatively high probability of occurrence. Special game Generate a state.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2特別遊 技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、遊技回 数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることができる 。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state is generated. However, in the first special game state that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0017] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0017] Further, the present invention provides the following.
(4) 上記（1)〜（3)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
上記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選したとき、上 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる手段  Means for terminating the second special gaming state when the special combination is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the second special gaming state.
を備えたことを特徴とする。  It is provided with.
[0018] (4)の発明によれば、第 1特別遊技状態が発生するまで、第 2特別遊技状態を継続 させる。従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体 を消費した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2 特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、 遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けること ができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ 不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることをより防止すること ができる。 [0018] According to the invention of (4), the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state occurs. In the first special game state that occurs, the player can reliably receive a return for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0019] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0019] Further, the present invention provides the following.
(5) 上記（1)〜（3)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
1回の遊技に対して所定の上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を受け入れることが可能な受 入手段を備え、  It has a receiving means that can accept the input of game media up to a predetermined upper limit for one game,
上記第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段は、上記遊技回数が上記設定値に達したと き、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数が上記上限値であった場合に、第 2特 別遊技状態を発生させることを特徴とする。  The means for generating the second special game state is that when the number of games reaches the set value and the number of game media input for that game is the upper limit, the second special game state is generated. A state is generated.
[0020] (5)の発明によれば、遊技者が上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を行うことを促すことがで き、カジノ等の施設は収益の増大を図ることができる。 [0020] According to the invention of (5), it is possible to encourage the player to insert the game medium up to the upper limit value. In addition, a facility such as a casino can increase profits.
[0021] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0021] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(6)演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、  (6) A gaming machine equipped with an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、  A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象 となる設定値に達したとき、上記抽選プログラムを実行することにより上記特別の役に 当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプロ グラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と  When the number of games that are counted cumulatively every time a game is played reaches the set value to be compared with the number of games, the probability of winning the special role by executing the lottery program is relatively A program for generating a second special gaming state set to a high level from the storage device and executing the program.
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  A game machine characterized by executing
[0022] (6)の発明によれば、遊技回数が上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達した とき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状 態を発生させる。 [0022] According to the invention of (6), when the number of games reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the second special game state is set to have a relatively high probability of occurrence. Generate a special gaming state.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2特別遊 技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、遊技回 数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることができる 。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state is generated. However, in the first special game state that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0023] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0023] Further, the present invention provides the following.
(7)演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備え、複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技回数を 遊技機ごとに累積的に計数する制御装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機であ つて、  (7) A gaming machine that includes an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device, and that is connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of the plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
上記演算処理装置は、 上記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、 The arithmetic processing unit is A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、上記通信回線を介して、上記記憶装置に記憶された遊技機 の識別情報を上記制御装置に送信する処理と、  A process of transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine stored in the storage device to the control device via the communication line each time a game is performed;
上記遊技機の識別情報に基づいて上記制御装置によって累積的に計数される遊技 回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達したときに、上記制御装置か ら送信される指令信号を受信する処理と、  A command signal transmitted from the control device when the number of games cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games. Processing to receive
上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選プログラムを実行することにより上記特別の役 に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプ ログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と  Based on the command signal, a program for generating the second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is read from the storage device. Process to be executed
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  A game machine characterized by executing
[0024] (7)の発明によれば、制御装置において計数される遊技回数が上記遊技回数との比 較対象となる設定値に達したとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高 く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。 [0024] According to the invention of (7), when the number of games counted in the control device reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the probability that the first special gaming state will occur is relative. The second special game state set to high is generated.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2特別遊 技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、遊技回 数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることができる 。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state is generated. However, in the first special game state that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0025] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0025] Further, the present invention provides the following.
(8)演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、  (8) A gaming machine equipped with an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、 決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、 A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device; When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技回数を累積的に計数する処理と、  A process of cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is played,
遊技回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象として定められた設定値に達している力否 かを判定する処理と、  A process for determining whether or not the number of games has reached a set value determined as a comparison target with the number of games described above;
遊技回数が設定値に達していると判定されたとき、上記抽選プログラムを実行するこ とにより上記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態 を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, by executing the lottery program, a second special game state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high is generated. A game machine that executes a process of reading a program from the storage device and executing the program.
[0026] (8)の発明によれば、遊技回数が上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達した とき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状 態を発生させる。 [0026] According to the invention of (8), when the number of games reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the second special game state is set to have a relatively high probability of occurrence. Generate a special gaming state.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2特別遊 技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、遊技回 数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることができる 。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state is generated. However, in the first special game state that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for having played the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0027] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0027] Further, the present invention provides the following.
(9) 上記（6)〜（8)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (9) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選したとき、上 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる処理を実行することを特徴とする。  When the special combination is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the second special gaming state, the process for ending the second special gaming state is executed.
[0028] (9)の発明によれば、第 1特別遊技状態が発生するまで、第 2特別遊技状態を継続 させる。従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体 を消費した場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、第 2 特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技者は、 遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けること ができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ 不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることをより防止すること ができる。 [0028] According to the invention of (9), the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special gaming state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the second special gaming state occurs. In the first special gaming state that occurs in the game, It is possible to receive a reward for playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0029] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0029] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(10) 上記（6)〜（8)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (10) The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記遊技回数が上記設定値に達したとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入 数が、予め定められた 1回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数の上限値であった場 合に、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを実行することを特徴とする。  When the number of games reaches the set value, if the number of game media input for that game is the predetermined upper limit value of the number of game media input for one game, the second A program for generating a special game state is executed.
[0030] (10)の発明によれば、遊技者が上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を行うことを促すことが でき、カジノ等の施設は収益の増大を図ることができる。  [0030] According to the invention of (10), the player can be encouraged to insert the game medium up to the upper limit value, and the facility such as a casino can increase profits.
[0031] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0031] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(11)抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  (11) a role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、上記遊技媒体の収 支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったとき、上記抽選により上記特別の役に当 選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  Probability of winning the special role by the lottery when the balance of the game media that is counted cumulatively every time the game is played falls below the set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. And a means for generating a second special gaming state in which is set relatively high.
[0032] (11)の発明によれば、遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象となる 設定値以下になったとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定さ れた第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。 [0032] According to the invention of (11), when the balance of the game medium is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game medium, the probability that the first special game state will occur is relatively high. The set second special gaming state is generated.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、必 ず、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊 技者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確 実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対 して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防 止することができる。 Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value. In the first special game state that occurs in the special game state, the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can play games. If it is uncomfortable, it can prevent distrust and lose interest in the game.
[0033] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0033] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(12)複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技媒体の収支を遊技機ごとに累積的に計数 する制御装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機であって、  (12) A gaming machine connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the balance of gaming media in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  A role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、上記通信回線を介して、その回の遊技における遊技媒体の 収支を遊技機の識別情報とともに、上記制御装置に送信する手段と、  Means for transmitting the balance of game media in the game of the time, together with the identification information of the gaming machine, to the control device via the communication line each time a game is played;
上記遊技機の識別情報とその回における遊技媒体の収支とに基づいて上記制御装 置によって累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、上記遊技媒体の収支との比較 対象となる設定値に達したときに上記制御装置力 送信される指令信号を受信する 手段と、  Based on the identification information of the gaming machine and the balance of the game media at that time, the balance of the game media that is cumulatively counted by the control device reaches a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. Means for receiving a command signal transmitted by the control device force when
上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的 に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と  Based on the command signal, means for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special combination by the lottery is set relatively high;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[0034] (12)の発明によれば、制御装置において計数される遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒 体の収支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生す る確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。  [0034] According to the invention of (12), the first special gaming state occurs when the balance of the game media counted in the control device is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. The second special gaming state is set with a relatively high probability of playing.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、必 ず、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊 技者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確 実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対 して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防 止することができる。  Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value. In the first special game state that occurs in the special game state, the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
[0035] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 (13)抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、 [0035] Sarako, the present invention provides the following. (13) a role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技媒体の収支を累積的に計数する手段と、  Means for cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played;
上記遊技媒体の収支が、上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象として定められた設定 値以下になった力否かを判定する手段と、  Means for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium is equal to or less than a set value determined as a comparison target with the balance of the game medium;
遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になったと判定したとき、上記抽選により上記特別の 役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  And a means for generating a second special gaming state in which, when it is determined that the balance of gaming media has become equal to or less than a set value, the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by the lottery. A gaming machine.
[0036] (13)の発明によれば、遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象となる 設定値以下になったとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定さ れた第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。 [0036] According to the invention of (13), when the balance of the game media is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media, the probability that the first special game state will occur is relatively high. The set second special gaming state is generated.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、必 ず、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊 技者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確 実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対 して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防 止することができる。  Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value. In the first special game state that occurs in the special game state, the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
[0037] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0037] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(14) 上記（11)〜（13)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (14) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above,
上記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選したとき、上 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる手段  Means for terminating the second special gaming state when the special combination is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the second special gaming state.
を備えたことを特徴とする。  It is provided with.
[0038] (14)の発明によれば、第 1特別遊技状態が発生するまで、第 2特別遊技状態を継続 させる。従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体 を消費した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば 、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技 者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実 に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対し て不快感や不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることをより 防止することができる。 [0038] According to the invention of (14), the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special game state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the balance of the game media reaches the set value, the second special game state will be In the first special gaming state that occurs The player can reliably receive a return for playing the game until the balance of the game media reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
[0039] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0039] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(15) 上記（11)〜（13)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (15) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (13) above,
1回の遊技に対して所定の上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を受け入れることが可能な受 入手段を備え、  It has a receiving means that can accept the input of game media up to a predetermined upper limit for one game,
上記第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段は、上記遊技媒体の収支が上記設定値以 下になつたとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数が上記上限値であった場 合に、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させることを特徴とする。  The means for generating the second special gaming state is that when the balance of the game media falls below the set value, the number of game media inserted for that game is the upper limit value. 2. It is characterized by generating a special game state.
[0040] (15)の発明によれば、遊技者が上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を行うことを促すことが でき、カジノ等の施設は収益の増大を図ることができる。 [0040] According to the invention of (15), the player can be encouraged to insert the game media up to the upper limit value, and the facility such as a casino can increase profits.
[0041] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0041] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(16)演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、  (16) A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、  A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、上記遊技媒体の収 支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったとき、上記抽選プログラムを実行すること により上記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を 発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  When the balance of the game media that is counted cumulatively every time a game is performed falls below the set value to be compared with the balance of the game media, the lottery program is executed to execute the special role. A game machine for executing a process for reading out and executing a program for generating a second special game state set with a relatively high probability of winning from the storage device.
[0042] (16)の発明によれば、遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象となる 設定値以下になったとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定さ れた第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。 [0042] According to the invention of (16), the probability that the first special gaming state occurs is relatively high when the balance of the game media is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. Set 2nd special gaming state is generated.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、必 ず、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊 技者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確 実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対 して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防 止することができる。 Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value. In the first special game state that occurs in the special game state, the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 Further, the present invention provides the following.
(17)演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備え、複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技媒体 の収支を遊技機ごとに累積的に計数する制御装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊 技機であって、  (17) A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device and connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the balance of gaming media in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine. ,
上記演算処理装置は、 The arithmetic processing unit is
上記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、 A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、 When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、上記通信回線を介して、上記記憶装置に記憶された当該遊 技における遊技媒体の投入数及び払出数を遊技機の識別情報とともに、上記制御 装置に送信する処理と、 A process of transmitting the number of game media inserted and paid out in the game stored in the storage device together with the identification information of the gaming machine to the control device through the communication line each time a game is performed;
上記遊技機の識別情報と当該遊技における遊技媒体の投入数及び払出数とに基づ いて上記制御装置によって累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、上記遊技媒体 の収支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったときに、上記制御装置から送信される 指令信号を受信する処理と、 The balance of the game media that is cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine and the number of game media inserted and paid out in the game is to be compared with the balance of the game media. A process of receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when the set value falls below the set value;
上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選プログラムを実行することにより上記特別の役 に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプ ログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。 Based on the command signal, a program for generating the second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is read from the storage device. Process to be executed A game machine characterized by executing
[0044] (17)の発明によれば、遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象となる 設定値以下になったとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定さ れた第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。  [0044] According to the invention of (17), the probability that the first special gaming state will occur is relatively high when the balance of the game media is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. The set second special gaming state is generated.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、必 ず、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊 技者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確 実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対 して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防 止することができる。  Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value. In the first special game state that occurs in the special game state, the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
[0045] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0045] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(18)演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、  (18) A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、  A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技媒体の収支を累積的に計数する処理と、  A process of cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played,
遊技媒体の収支が、上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象として定められた設定値以 下になつたか否かを判定する処理と、  A process for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium has become equal to or less than a set value determined as a comparison target with the balance of the game medium;
遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になったと判定したとき、上記抽選プログラムを実行 することにより上記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊 技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、上記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処 理と  When it is determined that the balance of the gaming media has fallen below the set value, by executing the lottery program, a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set to be relatively high is generated. Processing to read and execute the program from the storage device;
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  A game machine characterized by executing
[0046] (18)の発明によれば、遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象となる 設定値以下になったとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生する確率が相対的に高く設定さ れた第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる。 [0046] According to the invention of (18), the balance of the game media is to be compared with the balance of the game media. When the value falls below the set value, the second special gaming state is set with a relatively high probability that the first special gaming state will occur.
従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費 した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、必 ず、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊 技者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確 実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対 して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防 止することができる。  Therefore, even if the first special gaming state does not occur for a long period of time and a large number of game media are consumed, the second game must be performed if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value. In the first special game state that occurs in the special game state, the player can surely receive a return for having played the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
[0047] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0047] Sarako, the present invention provides the following.
(19) 上記（16)〜（18)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (19) The gaming machine according to any one of (16) to (18) above,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役に当選したとき、上 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる処理を実行することを特徴とする。  When the special combination is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the second special gaming state, the process for ending the second special gaming state is executed.
[0048] (19)の発明によれば、第 1特別遊技状態が発生するまで、第 2特別遊技状態を継続 させる。従って、長期間にわたって第 1特別遊技状態が発生せずに多数の遊技媒体 を消費した場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば 、第 2特別遊技状態が発生し、その中で発生する第 1特別遊技状態において、遊技 者は、遊技媒体の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実 に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対し て不快感や不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることをより 防止することができる。  [0048] According to the invention of (19), the second special game state is continued until the first special game state occurs. Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without the first special game state occurring for a long period of time, if the game is played until the balance of the game media reaches the set value, the second special game state will be In the first special gaming state that occurs, the player can reliably receive a return for playing the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to further prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful of the game or losing interest or interest in the game.
[0049] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0049] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(20) 上記（16)〜（18)のいずれか 1の遊技機であって、  (20) The gaming machine according to any one of (16) to (18) above,
上記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit is
上記遊技媒体の収支が上記設定値以下になったとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技 媒体の投入数が、予め定められた 1回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数の上限値 であった場合、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを実行することを特 徴とする。 When the balance of the game media is less than or equal to the set value, the number of game media input for that game is the upper limit value of the number of game media input for a single game. (2) Specially execute a program for generating a special gaming state. It is a sign.
[0050] (20)の発明によれば、遊技者が上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を行うことを促すことが でき、カジノ等の施設は収益の増大を図ることができる。  [0050] According to the invention of (20), it is possible to prompt the player to insert the game media up to the upper limit value, and the facility such as a casino can increase profits.
[0051] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0051] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(21)所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手 段と、  (21) a means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when winning a predetermined lottery;
遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、上記抽選の当選確率を高く設定する手段と、 上記当選確率が高く設定されているときに上記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段と  Depending on the number of games played by the player, the means for setting the winning probability of the lottery high, and the fact that the lottery was won when the winning probability is set high is based on the winning probability. Means to return
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[0052] (21)の発明によれば、遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、遊技者にとって有利な遊 技状態に対する当選確率が高く設定され、有利な遊技状態が発生するまで、当選確 率が高く設定された状態が継続される。従って、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者 は、長期間にわたって遊技を行ったことに対する還元を、確実に受けることができる。 その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  [0052] According to the invention of (21), the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high according to the number of games played by the player, and the winning confirmation is made until an advantageous gaming state occurs. The state where the rate is set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for having played a game for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0053] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0053] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(22)所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手 段と、  (22) a means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when winning a predetermined lottery;
遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、上記抽選の当選確率を高く設定する手段と、 上記当選確率が高く設定されているときに上記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段と  Based on the winning probability based on the means of setting the winning probability of the lottery high according to the player's game media balance and winning the lottery when the winning probability is set high. Means to return
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[0054] (22)の発明によれば、遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、遊技者にとって有利な 遊技状態に対する当選確率が高く設定され、有利な遊技状態が発生するまで、当選 確率が高く設定された状態が継続される。従って、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技 者は、そのことに対する還元を、確実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒 体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する 興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。 [0054] According to the invention of (22), according to the player's balance of game media, the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high, and the winning probability is increased until an advantageous gaming state occurs. The state set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for that. As a result, a player who has consumed a large number of game media may feel distrust if the game is unpleasant, It is possible to prevent loss of interest and interest.
[0055] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。 [0055] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(23)所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させるス テツプと、  (23) a step for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won;
遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、上記抽選の当選確率を高く設定するステップと 上記当選確率が高く設定されているときに上記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻すステップと  Depending on the number of games played by the player, the step of setting the winning probability of the lottery to be high and the winning probability is returned to the original when the winning probability is set to be high. Step and
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技制御方法。  A game control method comprising:
[0056] (23)の発明によれば、遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、遊技者にとって有利な遊 技状態に対する当選確率が高く設定され、有利な遊技状態が発生するまで、当選確 率が高く設定された状態が継続される。従って、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者 は、長期間にわたって遊技を行ったことに対する還元を、確実に受けることができる。 その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  [0056] According to the invention of (23), the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high according to the number of games played by the player, and winning is confirmed until an advantageous gaming state occurs. The state where the rate is set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for having played a game for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0057] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0057] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(24)所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させるス テツプと、  (24) a step for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won;
遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、上記抽選の当選確率を高く設定するステップと 上記当選確率が高く設定されているときに上記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻すステップと  Depending on the player's balance of the game media, the step of setting the winning probability of the lottery is set high, and the winning probability is returned to the original when the winning probability is set high. Step and
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技制御方法。  A game control method comprising:
[0058] (24)の発明によれば、遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、遊技者にとって有利な 遊技状態に対する当選確率が高く設定され、有利な遊技状態が発生するまで、当選 確率が高く設定された状態が継続される。従って、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技 者は、そのことに対する還元を、確実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒 体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する 興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。 [0058] According to the invention of (24), according to the player's balance of game media, the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high, and the winning probability is increased until an advantageous gaming state occurs. The state set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for that. As a result, a player who has consumed a large number of game media may feel distrust if the game is unpleasant, It is possible to prevent loss of interest and interest.
[0059] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0059] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(25)遊技機と制御装置とを備えた制御システムであって、  (25) A control system comprising a gaming machine and a control device,
上記制御装置は、  The control device
上記遊技機において遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて上記遊技機に信号を送信す る手段を備え、  Means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine according to the number of games played by the player in the gaming machine;
上記遊技機は、  The above gaming machine is
所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手段と、 上記制御装置から受信した上記信号に基づいて、上記抽選の当選確率を高く設定 する手段と、  Means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won, and means for setting the winning probability of the lottery high based on the signal received from the control device;
上記当選確率が高く設定されているときに上記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段とを備えたことを特徴とする遊技システム。  A gaming system comprising: means for returning the winning probability when the winning is won when the winning probability is set high.
[0060] (25)の発明によれば、遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、遊技者にとって有利な遊 技状態に対する当選確率が高く設定され、有利な遊技状態が発生するまで、当選確 率が高く設定された状態が継続される。従って、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者 は、長期間にわたって遊技を行ったことに対する還元を、確実に受けることができる。 その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を 募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  [0060] According to the invention of (25), the winning probability for the gaming state advantageous to the player is set high according to the number of games played by the player, and winning is confirmed until an advantageous gaming state occurs. The state where the rate is set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for having played a game for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0061] さら〖こ、本発明は、以下のようなものを提供する。  [0061] Sarako, The present invention provides the following.
(26)遊技機と制御装置とを備えた遊技システムであって、  (26) A gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a control device,
上記制御装置は、  The control device
上記遊技機における遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて上記遊技機に信号を送信 する手段を備え、  Means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine according to the balance of game media of the player in the gaming machine;
上記遊技機は、  The above gaming machine is
所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手段と、 上記制御装置から受信した上記信号に基づいて、上記抽選の当選確率を高く設定 する手段と、  Means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won, and means for setting the winning probability of the lottery high based on the signal received from the control device;
上記当選確率が高く設定されているときに上記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段とを備えたことを特徴とする遊技システム。 When the lottery is won when the winning probability is set high, A gaming system comprising means for returning the winning probability.
[0062] (26)の発明によれば、遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、遊技者にとって有利な 遊技状態に対する当選確率が高く設定され、有利な遊技状態が発生するまで、当選 確率が高く設定された状態が継続される。従って、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技 者は、そのことに対する還元を、確実に受けることができる。その結果、多数の遊技媒 体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する 興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。  [0062] According to the invention of (26), according to the player's balance of game media, the winning probability for a gaming state advantageous to the player is set high, and the winning probability is increased until an advantageous gaming state occurs. The state set high is continued. Therefore, a player who has consumed a large number of game media can surely receive a return for that. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling unpleasant if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
発明の効果  The invention's effect
[0063] 本発明によれば、多数のコインを消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感 を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。 発明を実施するための最良の形態  [0063] According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of coins from causing discomfort if the player feels uncomfortable or losing interest in the game. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0064] 図 1は、本発明の一実施形態に係る遊技システムの全体構成を示す概略図である。 FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system according to one embodiment of the present invention.
遊技システム 100は、複数の遊技機 10と、これらの遊技機 10と所定の通信回線 101 を介して接続された制御装置 200とを備えている。このような遊技システム 100は、バ 一やカジノ等の様々な遊技を行うことが可能な 1つの遊技施設内に構築されてもよく The gaming system 100 includes a plurality of gaming machines 10 and a control device 200 connected to these gaming machines 10 via a predetermined communication line 101. Such a gaming system 100 may be built in one gaming facility capable of performing various games such as a casino or a casino.
、複数の遊技施設間に構築されてもよい。また、 1つの遊技施設内に構築される場合 には、該遊技施設のフロアやセクションごとに遊技システム 100が構築されてもよい。 通信回線 101は、特に限定されるものではなぐ有線であっても無線であってもよぐ 専用回線や交換回線等を採用することが可能である。 It may be constructed among a plurality of gaming facilities. Further, when the game system 100 is constructed in one game facility, the game system 100 may be constructed for each floor or section of the game facility. The communication line 101 is not particularly limited, and may be a wired line or a wireless line.
[0065] 本実施形態にぉ 、て、遊技機 10は、スロットマシンである。ただし、本発明にお 、て 、遊技機としては、スロットマシンに限定されず、例えば、ビデオスロットマシン、ビデ ォカードゲーム機等の所謂シングルゲーム機であってもよぐ競馬ゲームやビンゴゲ ームゃ宝くじ等のように結果が表示されるまでに所定の時間を要するゲームを行う所 謂マスゲーム機（マルチ ·ターミナル ·ゲーミンダマシン）等であってもよ 、。  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a slot machine. However, in the present invention, the gaming machine is not limited to a slot machine, but may be a so-called single game machine such as a video slot machine or a video card game machine, for example, a horse racing game or a bingo game. It may be a so-called mass game machine (multi-terminal gamer machine) that plays a game such as a lottery that requires a predetermined time until the result is displayed.
[0066] 遊技機 10では、遊技媒体として、コイン、紙幣又はこれらに相当する電子的な有価 情報が用いられるものである。ただし、本発明において、遊技媒体としては、特に限 定されるものではなぐ例えば、メダル、トークン、電子マネー、チケットを挙げることが できる。なお、上記チケットとしては、特に限定されるものではなぐ例えば、後述する ようなバーコード付きチケット等を挙げることができる。 In the gaming machine 10, coins, bills, or electronic valuable information corresponding to these are used as game media. However, in the present invention, the game media are not particularly limited, and examples thereof include medals, tokens, electronic money, and tickets. The ticket is not particularly limited. For example, it will be described later. Such as a ticket with a bar code.
[0067] 制御装置 200は、複数の遊技機 10を制御するものである。特に、本実施形態におい て、制御装置 200は、各遊技機 10における還元モードへの移行を制御するものであ る。還元モードは、本発明における第 2特別遊技状態に相当するものであり、還元モ ードにおいては、ボーナスゲームの発生する確率が相対的に高くなる。なお、制御装 置 200は、還元モードへ移行を制御することによって、還元率を制御するものであつ てもよい。このようにする場合、制御装置 200は、遊技機 10の還元率を個別に制御 するものであってもよぐ複数の遊技機 10全体における還元率を制御するものであつ てもよい。  [0067] The control device 200 controls a plurality of gaming machines 10. In particular, in the present embodiment, the control device 200 controls the transition to the return mode in each gaming machine 10. The return mode corresponds to the second special game state in the present invention, and in the return mode, the probability of occurrence of a bonus game is relatively high. Note that the control device 200 may control the reduction rate by controlling the transition to the reduction mode. In this case, the control device 200 may control the return rate of the plurality of gaming machines 10 or may control the return rate of the gaming machines 10 individually.
[0068] 制御装置 200は、複数の遊技機 10を有する遊技施設に設置されている所謂ホール サーバや、複数の遊技施設を一括管理するサーバ等としての機能を有するものであ つてもよい。なお、各遊技機 10にはそれぞれ固有の識別番号が付されていて、制御 装置 200は、当該識別番号により、各遊技機 10から送られてくるデータの出所を判 別している。また、制御装置 200から遊技機 10にデータを送信する場合にも、識別 番号を用いて送信先を指定して ヽる。  The control device 200 may have a function as a so-called hall server installed in a gaming facility having a plurality of gaming machines 10 or a server that collectively manages a plurality of gaming facilities. Each gaming machine 10 is given a unique identification number, and the control device 200 determines the origin of data sent from each gaming machine 10 based on the identification number. Also, when transmitting data from the control device 200 to the gaming machine 10, the transmission destination can be specified using the identification number.
[0069] 遊技機の識別番号は、本発明における遊技機の識別情報に相当するものである。本 発明において、遊技機の識別情報は、特に限定されるものではなぐ例えば、文字、 記号、数字、これらの組合せ等を挙げることができる。  [0069] The identification number of the gaming machine corresponds to the identification information of the gaming machine in the present invention. In the present invention, the identification information of the gaming machine is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include letters, symbols, numbers, and combinations thereof.
[0070] 図 2は、本発明の一実施形態に係る遊技機を模式的に示す斜視図である。  FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.
遊技機 10は、キャビネット 11と、キャビネット 11の上側に設置されたトップボックス 12 と、キャビネット 11の前面に設けられたメインドア 13とを備えている。キャビネット 11の 内部には、 3個のリール 14 (14L、 14C、 14R)が回転可能に設けられている。各リー ル 14の外周面には、 22個の図柄（以下、シンボルともいう）からなるシンボル列が描 かれている。  The gaming machine 10 includes a cabinet 11, a top box 12 installed on the upper side of the cabinet 11, and a main door 13 provided on the front surface of the cabinet 11. Inside the cabinet 11, three reels 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) are rotatably provided. On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 14, a symbol row consisting of 22 symbols (hereinafter also referred to as symbols) is drawn.
[0071] メインドア 13における各リール 14の前方には、下側画像表示パネル 16が設けられて いる。下側画像表示パネル 16は、透明液晶パネルを備えていて、遊技中には、遊技 に関する各種の情報や演出画像等が表示される。  A lower image display panel 16 is provided in front of each reel 14 in the main door 13. The lower image display panel 16 includes a transparent liquid crystal panel, and various information about the game, effect images, and the like are displayed during the game.
下側画像表示パネル 16には、クレジット数表示部 31及びペイアウト数表示部 32が 設定されている。クレジット数表示部 31には、クレジットされたコインの枚数が画像に よって表示される。ペイアウト表示部 32には、入賞ライン L上に停止表示されたシン ボルの組合せが所定の組合せであった場合に払い出されるコインの数が画像によつ て表示される。 The lower image display panel 16 has a credit amount display section 31 and a payout display section 32. Is set. In the credit amount display section 31, the number of credited coins is displayed as an image. In the payout display section 32, the number of coins paid out when the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line L is a predetermined combination is displayed as an image.
[0072] 下側画像表示パネル 16には、その背面を視認可能な 3個の表示窓 15 (15L、 15C、 15R)が形成されていて、各表示窓 15を介して各リール 14の外周面に描かれたシン ボルが夫々 3個ずつ表示される。下側画像表示パネル 16には、 3個の表示窓 15を 水平に横切る 1本の入賞ライン Lが形成されている。入賞ライン Lは、シンボルの組合 せを規定するものである。入賞ライン L上に停止表示されたシンボルの組合せが所定 の組合せであった場合に、その組合せとコインの投入数 (BET数）とに応じた枚数の コインが払い出される。  [0072] The lower image display panel 16 is formed with three display windows 15 (15L, 15C, 15R) whose rear surface can be visually recognized, and the outer peripheral surface of each reel 14 through each display window 15. Three symbols are displayed on the screen. The lower image display panel 16 has one winning line L that horizontally crosses the three display windows 15. The winning line L defines the symbol combination. When the combination of symbols stopped on the pay line L is a predetermined combination, coins corresponding to the combination and the number of coins inserted (BET number) are paid out.
[0073] なお、本発明においては、例えば、 3個の表示窓 15を水平に又は斜めに横切る複数 本の入賞ライン Lが形成されて 、て、コインの投入数に応じた数の入賞ライン Lが有 効化され、有効化された入賞ライン L上に停止表示されたシンボルの組合せが所定 の組合せであった場合に、その組合せに応じた枚数のコインが払い出されることとし てもよい。  [0073] In the present invention, for example, a plurality of pay lines L that cross the three display windows 15 horizontally or obliquely are formed, and the number of pay lines L corresponding to the number of coins inserted is determined. If the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the activated pay line L is a predetermined combination, the number of coins corresponding to the combination may be paid out.
[0074] さらに、下側画像表示パネル 16の前面には、図示しないが、タツチパネル 69が設け られて 、て、遊技者はタツチパネル 69を操作して各種の指示を入力することかできる  [0074] Furthermore, although not shown, a touch panel 69 is provided on the front surface of the lower image display panel 16, so that the player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 69.
[0075] 下側画像表示パネル 16の下方には、遊技者によって遊技進行に係る指示が入力さ れる複数のボタン 23〜27からなるコントロールパネル 20と、コインをキャビネット 11 内に受け入れるコイン受入口 21と、紙幣識別器 22とが設けられている。 [0075] Below the lower image display panel 16, a control panel 20 including a plurality of buttons 23 to 27 into which instructions relating to game progress are input by a player, and a coin receiving slot 21 for receiving coins into the cabinet 11 And a bill validator 22 is provided.
[0076] コントロールパネル 20には、スピンボタン 23と、チェンジボタン 24と、キャッシュアウト ボタン 25と、 1— BETボタン 26と、最大 BETボタン 27とが設けられている。スピンボタ ン 23は、リール 14の回転を開始させる指示を入力するためのものである。チェンジボ タン 24は、遊技施設の係員に両替を要求する際に用いられるものである。キャッシュ アウトボタン 25は、クレジットされているコインをコイントレイ 18に払い出す指示を入力 するためのものである。 [0077] 1— BETボタン 26は、クレジットされているコインのうち、 1枚のコインを遊技に賭ける 指示を入力するためのものである。最大 BETボタン 27は、クレジットされているコイン のうち、 1回の遊技に賭けることが可能な最大枚数 (本実施形態では 50枚)のコイン を遊技に賭ける指示を入力するためのものである。 The control panel 20 is provided with a spin button 23, a change button 24, a cashout button 25, a 1-BET button 26, and a maximum BET button 27. The spin button 23 is for inputting an instruction to start the rotation of the reel 14. The change button 24 is used when requesting a change of money from a game facility staff. The cashout button 25 is used to input an instruction to pay out the credited coins to the coin tray 18. [0077] The 1-BET button 26 is used to input an instruction to bet one coin among the credited coins on the game. The maximum BET button 27 is used to input an instruction to bet a maximum number of coins (50 in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game among credited coins.
[0078] なお、本発明において、遊技媒体の投入とは、遊技媒体が遊技に賭けられることをい う。例えば、コイン受入口 21に投入されたコインが、直接遊技に賭けられる場合、コィ ン受入口 21へのコインの投入が、遊技媒体の投入に相当する。ただし、本実施形態 のように、コイン受入口 21へコインが投入されると、ー且クレジットされ、 1— BETボタ ン 26又は最大 BETボタン 27が操作されると、クレジットされたコインが遊技に賭けら れる場合、クレジットされたコインが遊技に賭けられることが、遊技媒体の投入に相当 する。  In the present invention, the insertion of the game medium means that the game medium is bet on the game. For example, when a coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 is directly bet on a game, inserting the coin into the coin receiving slot 21 corresponds to inserting a game medium. However, as in this embodiment, when a coin is inserted into the coin receiving slot 21, it is credited, and when the 1-BET button 26 or the maximum BET button 27 is operated, the credited coin is transferred to the game. When a wager is placed, betting a credited coin on a game is equivalent to inserting a game medium.
[0079] 紙幣識別器 22は、紙幣の適否を識別するとともに正規の紙幣をキャビネット 11内に 受け入れるものである。なお、紙幣識別器 22は、後述するバーコード付チケット 39を 読み取ることができるように構成されていてもよい。メインドア 13の下部前面、すなわ ち、コントロールパネル 20の下方には、遊技機 10のキャラクタ等が描かれたベリーガ ラス 34が設けられている。  The banknote discriminator 22 recognizes the suitability of banknotes and accepts regular banknotes in the cabinet 11. Note that the bill validator 22 may be configured to be able to read a bar code-added ticket 39 to be described later. A belly glass 34 on which a character of the gaming machine 10 is drawn is provided on the lower front surface of the main door 13, that is, below the control panel 20.
[0080] トップボックス 12の前面には、上側画像表示パネル 33が設けられている。上側画像 表示パネル 33は、液晶パネルを備えていて、例えば、遊技内容の紹介や遊技のル ールの説明を表す画像が表示される。  An upper image display panel 33 is provided on the front surface of the top box 12. The upper image display panel 33 includes a liquid crystal panel, and displays, for example, an image representing introduction of game contents and explanation of game rules.
[0081] また、トップボックス 12には、スピーカ 29が設けられている。上側画像表示パネル 33 の下側には、チケットプリンタ 35と、カードリーダ 36と、データ表示器 37と、キーパッド 38とが設けられている。チケットプリンタ 35は、クレジット数や日時や遊技機 10の識 別番号等のデータがコード化されたバーコードをチケットに印刷し、バーコード付チ ケット 39として出力するものである。遊技者は、バーコード付チケット 39を他の遊技機 に読み取らせて該遊技機で遊技を行ったり、バーコード付チケット 39を遊技施設の 所定箇所 (例えばカジノ内のキヤッシャ）で紙幣等に交換したりすることができる。  In addition, the top box 12 is provided with a speaker 29. On the lower side of the upper image display panel 33, a ticket printer 35, a card reader 36, a data display 37, and a keypad 38 are provided. The ticket printer 35 prints a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date and time, and an identification number of the gaming machine 10 is encoded on a ticket, and outputs it as a ticket 39 with a bar code. The player reads the ticket 39 with barcode to another gaming machine and plays the game with the gaming machine, or exchanges the ticket 39 with barcode with a bill or the like at a predetermined place in the gaming facility (for example, a cashier in the casino). You can do it.
[0082] カードリーダ 36は、スマートカードからのデータの読み取り及びスマートカードへのデ ータの書き込みを行うものである。スマートカードは、遊技者が所持するカードであり 、例えば、遊技者を識別するためのデータ、遊技者が行った遊技の履歴に関するデ ータが記憶される。スマートカードには、コイン、紙幣又はクレジットに相当するデータ が記憶されることとしてもよい。また、スマートカードにかえて、磁気ストライプカードを 採用してもよい。データ表示器 37は、蛍光ディスプレイ等力もなり、例えば、カードリ ーダ 36が読み取ったデータや、遊技者によってキーパッド 38を介して入力されたデ ータを表示するものである。キーパッド 38は、チケット発行等に関する指示やデータ を入力するためのものである。 The card reader 36 reads data from a smart card and writes data to the smart card. A smart card is a card possessed by a player. For example, data for identifying a player and data regarding the history of games played by the player are stored. The smart card may store data corresponding to coins, bills or credits. A magnetic stripe card may be adopted instead of the smart card. The data display 37 also serves as a fluorescent display, for example, to display data read by the card reader 36 and data input by the player via the keypad 38. The keypad 38 is used to input instructions and data related to ticket issuance.
[0083] 図 3は、各リールの外周面に描かれたシンボルの列を示した模式図である。 [0083] Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a column of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel.
左リール 14L、中リール 14C及び右リール 14Rの外周面には、夫々 22個のシンボル が描かれている。各リール 14に描かれたシンボルの列は、互いに異なっている。各シ ンボルの列は、「JACKPOT 7」、「BLUE 7」、「BELL」、「CHERRY」、「STRA WBERRYJ ,「PLUM」、「ORANGE」、「APPLE」のシンボルが組み合わされて構 成されている。  On the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 14L, middle reel 14C and right reel 14R, 22 symbols are drawn respectively. The columns of symbols drawn on each reel 14 are different from each other. Each symbol column is composed of the symbols “JACKPOT 7,” “BLUE 7,” “BELL,” “CHERRY,” “STRA WBERRYJ,“ PLUM, ”“ ORANGE, ”and“ APPLE ”. Yes.
[0084] rjACKPOT 7」、「BLUE 7」、「BELL」、「CHERRY」、 Γ STRAWBERRY] ,「P LUM」、「ORANGE」は、入賞ライン L上に 3つ停止表示された場合に、予め定めら れたクレジット数が遊技者の所有するクレジットとして追加される（図 12参照)。また、「 CHERRY」、「ORANGE」については、入賞ライン上に 1つ又は 2つ停止表示され た場合であっても、その数に応じて、予め定められたクレジット数が遊技者の所有す るクレジットとして追加される（図 12参照)。  [0084] “rjACKPOT 7”, “BLUE 7”, “BELL”, “CHERRY”, Γ STRAWBERRY], “P LUM”, “ORANGE” are determined in advance when 3 stoppages are displayed on the winning line L. The obtained credits are added as credits owned by the player (see Figure 12). In addition, regarding “CHERRY” and “ORANGE”, even if one or two stops are displayed on the winning line, a predetermined number of credits will be owned by the player according to the number. Added as credit (see Figure 12).
[0085] 「APPLE」は、ボーナスゲームトリガー（ボーナスゲームに移行するためのシンボル） である。「APPLE」が入賞ライン L上に 3つ停止表示された場合には、ボーナスゲー ムに移行することができる。ボーナスゲームは、第 1特別遊技状態に相当するもので ある。本実施形態において、ボーナスゲームは、フリーゲーム（コインを BETすること なく所定回数にわたって遊技を行うことができるゲーム)である。  “APPLE” is a bonus game trigger (a symbol for shifting to a bonus game). If three “APPLE” are stopped on the winning line L, you can move to the bonus game. The bonus game is equivalent to the first special game state. In this embodiment, the bonus game is a free game (a game that can be played a predetermined number of times without betting coins).
[0086] 本発明において、第 1特別遊技状態は、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態であれば、 特に限定されるものではない。また、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態としては、通常 の遊技状態 (第 1特別遊技状態又は第 2特別遊技状態以外の遊技状態)より有利で あれば、特に限定されるものではなぐ例えば、通常の遊技状態より多くの遊技媒体 を獲得し得る状態、通常の遊技状態より高い確率で遊技媒体を獲得し得る状態、通 常の遊技状態より遊技媒体の消費数が少なくなる状態等を挙げることができる。具体 的に、第 1特別遊技状態としては、フリーゲーム、セカンドゲーム、ミステリーボーナス 等を挙げることができる。 In the present invention, the first special gaming state is not particularly limited as long as it is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The gaming state advantageous to the player is not particularly limited as long as it is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (a gaming state other than the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state). More gaming media than gaming state , A state where game media can be acquired with a higher probability than the normal game state, a state where the number of game media consumed is lower than the normal game state, and the like. Specifically, examples of the first special gaming state include a free game, a second game, and a mystery bonus.
[0087] 各リール 14に描かれたシンボルの列は、 1 BETボタン 26又は最大 BETボタン 27 が押下された後にスピンボタン 23が押下されてゲームが開始されると、リール 14の回 転に伴って、表示窓 15において上方向から下方向へとスクロール表示され、所定時 間経過後に、リール 14の回転の停止に伴って、表示窓 15において停止表示される。 さらに、各シンボルの組合せに基づき各種の役（図 12参照）が予め定められていて、 役に対応するシンボルの組合せが入賞ライン L上で停止した際には、役に応じたコィ ンの払出数が、遊技者が所有するクレジットに加算される。また、ボーナスゲームトリ ガーが成立したときには、ボーナスゲームが発生する。  [0087] The symbol row drawn on each reel 14 indicates that when the spin button 23 is pressed after the 1 BET button 26 or the maximum BET button 27 is pressed and the game is started, the reel 14 rotates. Thus, the display window 15 is scrolled from the upper direction to the lower direction, and is stopped and displayed on the display window 15 as the reel 14 stops rotating after a predetermined time has elapsed. Furthermore, various combinations (see Fig. 12) are determined in advance based on the combination of symbols. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination stops on the winning line L, a coin corresponding to the combination is paid out. The number is added to the credits owned by the player. When a bonus game trigger is established, a bonus game is generated.
[0088] さらに、後述する還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされている場合には、上述したよう にシンボルが停止表示された後、還元モードに移行する。なお、ボーナスゲームが発 生した場合には、ボーナスゲームが終了した後に、還元モードに移行する。還元モ ードは、第 2特別遊技状態に相当するものである。本実施形態では、還元モードに移 行すると、ボーナスゲームの発生する確率が相対的に高くなる（図 14参照)。  Furthermore, when a return mode flag described later is set to “ON”, the symbol is stopped and displayed as described above, and then the mode is changed to the return mode. When a bonus game is generated, the mode is shifted to the return mode after the bonus game is ended. The reduction mode is equivalent to the second special game state. In the present embodiment, when the mode is shifted to the return mode, the probability that a bonus game will occur is relatively high (see FIG. 14).
[0089] 図 4は、図 2に示した遊技機の内部構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.
ゲーミングボード 50は、内部バスによって互い接続された CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51、 ROM55及びブート ROM52と、メモリカード 53に対応したカードスロット 5 3Sと、 GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54に対応した ICソケット 54Sとを備えている。  The gaming board 50 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a ROM 55 and a boot ROM 52 connected to each other via an internal bus, a card slot 53 corresponding to the memory card 53, and an IC socket corresponding to the GAL (Generic Array Logic) 54. With 54S.
[0090] メモリカード 53は、コンパクトフラッシュ (登録商標）等の不揮発性メモリからなり、ゲー ムプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムを記憶して 、る。ゲームプログラムには、 抽選プログラムが含まれている。上記抽選プログラムは、入賞ライン L上に停止表示 される各リール 14のシンボル（シンボルに対応するコード No. )を決定するためのプ ログラムである。上記抽選プログラムには、複数種類のペイアウト率 (例えば、 80%、 84%、 88%)の夫々に対応したシンボル重み付けデータが含まれている。シンボル 重み付けデータは、 3つのリール 14の夫々について、各シンボルのコード No. (図 3 参照）と、所定の数値範囲（0〜256)に属する 1又は複数の乱数値との対応関係を 示すデータである。ペイアウト率は、 GAL54から出力されるペイアウト率設定用デー タに基づいて定められるものであり、このペイアウト率に対応したシンボル重み付けデ ータに基づ 、て抽選が行われる。 The memory card 53 is composed of a nonvolatile memory such as CompactFlash (registered trademark), and stores a game program and a game system program. The game program includes a lottery program. The lottery program is a program for determining the symbols (code numbers corresponding to the symbols) of the reels 14 that are stopped on the winning line L. The lottery program includes symbol weighting data corresponding to a plurality of types of payout rates (for example, 80%, 84%, and 88%). The symbol weight data is the code number of each symbol for each of the three reels 14 (Fig. 3 Reference) and one or a plurality of random values belonging to a predetermined numerical range (0 to 256). The payout rate is determined based on the payout rate setting data output from the GAL 54, and a lottery is performed based on the symbol weighting data corresponding to the payout rate.
[0091] また、カードスロット 53Sは、メモリカード 53を挿抜可能なように構成されていて、 IDE バスによってマザ一ボード 40に接続されている。従って、カードスロット 53Sからメモリ カード 53を抜き取り、メモリカード 53に別のゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプロ グラムを書き込み、そのメモリカード 53をカードスロット 53Sに差し込むことにより、遊 技機 10で行われる遊技の種類や内容を変更することができる。また、一のゲームプ ログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムを記憶したメモリカード 53を、別のゲームプロ グラム及びゲームシステムプログラムを記憶したメモリカード 53に交換することによつ て、遊技機 10で行われる遊技の種類や内容を変更することも可能である。  Further, the card slot 53S is configured so that the memory card 53 can be inserted and removed, and is connected to the mother board 40 by an IDE bus. Therefore, the memory card 53 is removed from the card slot 53S, another game program and a game system program are written to the memory card 53, and the memory card 53 is inserted into the card slot 53S. The type and contents can be changed. In addition, by replacing the memory card 53 storing one game program and game system program with a memory card 53 storing another game program and game system program, the game performed on the gaming machine 10 can be performed. The type and contents can be changed.
ゲームプログラムには、遊技進行に係るプログラム、第 1特別遊技状態を発生させる ためのプログラム、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムが含まれる。また 、ゲームプログラムには、遊技中に出力される画像データや音データ、報知用データ としての画像データや音データが含まれる。  The game program includes a program related to game progress, a program for generating a first special gaming state, and a program for generating a second special gaming state. Further, the game program includes image data and sound data output during the game, and image data and sound data as notification data.
[0092] GAL54は、 OR固定型アレイ構造を有する PLDの一種である。 GAL54は、複数の 入力ポートと出力ポートとを備えていて、入力ポートに所定のデータが入力されると、 該データに対応したデータを出力ポートから出力する。この出力ポートから出力され たデータが、上述したペイアウト率設定用データである。  [0092] GAL54 is a kind of PLD having an OR fixed array structure. The GAL 54 includes a plurality of input ports and output ports. When predetermined data is input to the input port, the GAL 54 outputs data corresponding to the data from the output port. The data output from this output port is the aforementioned payout rate setting data.
また、 ICソケット 54Sは、 GAL54を着脱可能なように構成されていて、 PCIバスによ つてマザ一ボード 40に接続されている。従って、 ICソケット 54Sから GAL54を抜き取 り、 GAL54に格納されるプログラムを書き換えて、その GAL54を ICソケット 54Sに取 り付けることにより、 GAL54から出力されるペイアウト率設定用データを変更すること ができる。また、 GAL54を、別の GAL54に交換することによって、ペイアウト率設定 用データを変更することも可能である。  The IC socket 54S is configured so that the GAL 54 can be attached and detached, and is connected to the mother board 40 via a PCI bus. Therefore, by removing the GAL54 from the IC socket 54S, rewriting the program stored in the GAL54, and attaching the GAL54 to the IC socket 54S, the payout rate setting data output from the GAL54 can be changed. it can. It is also possible to change the payout rate setting data by exchanging GAL54 for another GAL54.
[0093] 内部バスによって互いに接続された CPU51、 ROM55及びブート ROM52は、 PCI バスによってマザ一ボード 40に接続されている。 PCIバスは、マザ一ボード 40とゲー ミングボード 50との間の信号伝達を行うとともに、マザ一ボード 40からゲーミングボー ド 50への電力供給を行う。 ROM55には、国識別情報及び認証プログラムが記憶さ れる。ブート ROM52には、予備認証プログラム及び CPU51が予備認証プログラム を起動するためのプログラム (ブートコード)等が記憶されて 、る。 The CPU 51, ROM 55, and boot ROM 52 connected to each other via an internal bus are connected to the mother board 40 via a PCI bus. The PCI bus is connected to the motherboard 40 In addition to transmitting signals to and from the gaming board 50, power is supplied from the mother board 40 to the gaming board 50. The ROM 55 stores country identification information and an authentication program. The boot ROM 52 stores a preliminary authentication program and a program (boot code) for the CPU 51 to start the preliminary authentication program.
[0094] 認証プログラムは、ゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムを認証するための プログラム（改竄チェックプログラム)である。認証プログラムは、認証取込処理の対象 となるゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムが改竄されて ヽな 、ことの確認 及び証明、すなわち、ゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムの認証を行う 手順 (認証手順）に沿って記述されている。予備認証プログラムは、上述した認証プ ログラムを認証するためのプログラムである。予備認証プログラムは、認証処理の対 象となる認証プログラムが改竄されていないことの証明、すなわち、認証プログラムの 認証を行う手順 (認証手順）に沿って記述されて 、る。 [0094] The authentication program is a program (tamper check program) for authenticating the game program and the game system program. The authentication program follows the procedure (authentication procedure) for confirming and verifying that the game program and game system program subject to the authentication capture process have been tampered with, ie, authenticating the game program and game system program. Is described. The preliminary authentication program is a program for authenticating the above-described authentication program. The preliminary authentication program is described in accordance with a proof that the authentication program to be authenticated has not been tampered with, that is, the authentication program authentication procedure (authentication procedure).
[0095] マザ一ボード 40は、市販の汎用マザ一ボード（パーソナルコンピュータの基本部品を 実装したプリント配線板）を用いて構成され、メイン CPU41と、 ROM (Read Only Me mory) 42と、 RAM (Random Access Memory) 43と、通信用インターフェイス 44とを備 えている。メイン CPU41は、本発明における演算処理装置である。  [0095] The mother board 40 is configured using a commercially available general-purpose mother board (printed wiring board on which basic components of a personal computer are mounted), and includes a main CPU 41, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 42, a RAM ( Random Access Memory) 43 and a communication interface 44. The main CPU 41 is an arithmetic processing device according to the present invention.
[0096] ROM42には、フラッシュメモリ等のメモリデバイスからなり、メイン CPU41により実行 される BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)等のプログラムと、恒久的なデータが記憶 されている。メイン CPU41によって BIOSが実行されると、所定の周辺装置の初期化 処理が行われるとともに、メモリカード 53に記憶されているゲームプログラム及びゲー ムシステムプログラムのゲーミングボード 50を介した取込処理が開始される。なお、本 発明において、 ROM42は、内容の書き換えが可能なものであってもよぐ不可能な ものであってもよい。  The ROM 42 is composed of a memory device such as a flash memory, and stores a program such as a BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) executed by the main CPU 41 and permanent data. When the BIOS is executed by the main CPU 41, initialization processing of predetermined peripheral devices is performed, and acquisition processing of the game program and game system program stored in the memory card 53 via the gaming board 50 is started. Is done. In the present invention, the ROM 42 may be a rewritable or impossible content.
[0097] RAM43には、メイン CPU41が作動する際に用いられるデータやプログラムが記憶 される。また、 RAM43は、ゲーミングボード 50を介して読み出される認証プログラム と、ゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムとを記憶することができる。 RAM 43は、本発明における記憶装置である。  The RAM 43 stores data and programs used when the main CPU 41 operates. Further, the RAM 43 can store an authentication program, a game program, and a game system program that are read out via the gaming board 50. The RAM 43 is a storage device in the present invention.
[0098] また、 RAM43には、還元モードフラグの記憶領域が設けられている。還元モードフ ラグは、第 2特別遊技状態としての還元モードに移行するか否かを選択する際に参 照されるフラグである。還元モードフラグの記憶領域は、例えば、所定ビット数の記憶 領域力 なり、該記憶領域における記憶内容に応じて還元モードフラグが" ON"又は "OFF"となる。還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされると、その後、必ず還元モード に移行する。そして、その後、還元モードにおいてボーナスゲームが実行されると、 還元モードフラグが" OFF"にされる。さらに、 RAM43には、クレジット数や、 1回の遊 技における投入数や払出数等のデータが記憶される。 In addition, the RAM 43 is provided with a return mode flag storage area. Reduction mode The lag is a flag that is referenced when selecting whether or not to shift to the return mode as the second special gaming state. The storage area of the reduction mode flag has, for example, a storage area power of a predetermined number of bits, and the reduction mode flag is “ON” or “OFF” depending on the storage contents in the storage area. If the reduction mode flag is set to "ON", then it always shifts to the reduction mode. Thereafter, when the bonus game is executed in the return mode, the return mode flag is set to “OFF”. Further, the RAM 43 stores data such as the number of credits, the number of coins inserted and paid out in one game.
[0099] 通信インターフェイス 44は、通信回線 101を介して制御装置 200との通信を行うため のものである。メイン CPU41は、 1回の遊技が行われるごとに、該遊技におけるコイン の投入数及び払出数を、遊技機 10の遊技機識別番号とともに、制御装置 200に送 信する。制御装置 200では、各遊技機識別番号に対応付けて、遊技回数、累積投 入数及び累積払出数が記憶される。制御装置 200においては、各遊技機識別番号 に対応付けて、遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値が定められていて、或る遊技機 10における遊技回数力 その遊技機 10に定められた設定値に達した場合には、制 御装置 200から還元指令信号が送信される。メイン CPU41は、通信インターフェイス 44を介して還元指令信号を受信すると、還元モードフラグを" ON"にセットする。  The communication interface 44 is for communicating with the control device 200 via the communication line 101. Each time a game is played, the main CPU 41 transmits the number of coins inserted and paid out together with the gaming machine identification number of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200. In the control device 200, the number of games, the cumulative number of coins to be paid, and the cumulative payout number are stored in association with each gaming machine identification number. In the control device 200, a setting value to be compared with the number of games is determined in association with each gaming machine identification number, and the number of times of gaming in a certain gaming machine 10 is set in the gaming machine 10. When the value is reached, a reduction command signal is transmitted from the control device 200. When the main CPU 41 receives the return command signal via the communication interface 44, the main CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “ON”.
[0100] また、マザ一ボード 40には、後述する本体 PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 60及びドア PCB80力 夫々 USBによって接続されている。さらに、マザ一ボード 40には、電源 ユニット 45が接続されている。電源ユニット 45からマザ一ボード 40に電力が供給され ると、マザ一ボード 40のメイン CPU41が起動するとともに、 PCIバスを介してゲーミン グボード 50に電力が供給されて CPU51が起動される。  [0100] Further, a main body PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 60 and a door PCB 80, which will be described later, are connected to the mother board 40 by USB. Further, a power supply unit 45 is connected to the mother board 40. When power is supplied from the power supply unit 45 to the mother board 40, the main CPU 41 of the mother board 40 is activated, and power is supplied to the gaming board 50 via the PCI bus to activate the CPU 51.
[0101] 本体 PCB60及びドア PCB80には、メイン CPU41に入力される入力信号を発生させ る機器や装置と、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号により動作が制御される機 器や装置とが接続されている。メイン CPU41は、メイン CPU41に入力された入力信 号に基づ 、て、 RAM43に記憶されたゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプロダラ ムを実行することにより、所定の演算処理を行ってその結果を RAM43に記憶したり 、各機器や装置に対する制御処理として各機器や装置に制御信号を送信したりする [0102] 本体 PCB60には、ランプ 30、サブ CPU61、ホッパー 66、コイン検出部 67、グラフィ ックボード 68、出力装置としてのスピーカ 29、タツチパネル 69、紙幣識別器 22、チケ ットプリンタ 35、カードリーダ 36、キースィッチ 38S及びデータ表示器 37が接続され ている。ランプ 30は、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて、所定のパ ターンで点灯する。 [0101] The main body PCB 60 and the door PCB 80 are connected to devices and devices that generate input signals input to the main CPU 41 and devices and devices whose operations are controlled by control signals output from the main CPU 41. ing. Based on the input signal input to the main CPU 41, the main CPU 41 executes the game program and game system program stored in the RAM 43 to perform predetermined arithmetic processing and store the result in the RAM 43. Memorize or send a control signal to each device or device as a control process for each device or device [0102] The main body PCB 60 has a lamp 30, sub CPU 61, hopper 66, coin detection unit 67, graphic board 68, speaker 29 as output device, touch panel 69, bill discriminator 22, ticket printer 35, card reader 36, key Switch 38S and data display 37 are connected. The lamp 30 lights up with a predetermined pattern based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41.
[0103] サブ CPU61は、リール 14 (14L、 14C、 14R)の回転及び停止の制御を行うもので ある。サブ CPU61には、 FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) 63及びドライバ 6 4を備えたモータ駆動回路 62が接続されている。 FPGA63は、プログラミング可能な LSI等の電子回路であり、ステッピングモータ 70の制御回路として機能するものであ る。ドライノく 64は、ステッピングモータ 70に入力するパルスの増幅回路として機能す るものである。モータ駆動回路 62には、各リール 14の回転を行うステッピングモータ 70 (70L、 70C、 70R)が接続されている。ステッピングモータ 70は、 1—2相励磁方 式のステッピングモータである。  [0103] The sub CPU 61 controls the rotation and stop of the reels 14 (14L, 14C, 14R). The sub CPU 61 is connected to a motor drive circuit 62 including an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) 63 and a driver 64. The FPGA 63 is a programmable electronic circuit such as an LSI and functions as a control circuit for the stepping motor 70. Dryino 64 functions as an amplification circuit for pulses input to the stepping motor 70. A stepping motor 70 (70L, 70C, 70R) that rotates each reel 14 is connected to the motor drive circuit 62. The stepping motor 70 is a 1-2 phase excitation type stepping motor.
[0104] 本発明において、ステッピングモータの励磁方式は、特に限定されるものではなぐ 例えば、 2相励磁方式、 1相励磁方式等を採用することも可能である。また、ステツピ ングモータにかえて、 DCモータを採用することとしてもよい。 DCモータが採用される 場合、サブ CPU61には、偏差カウンタ、 DZA変翻、サーボ増幅器が順に接続さ れ、サーボ増幅器に DCモータが接続されることになる。また、 DCモータの回転位置 は、ロータリエンコーダによって検出され、ロータリエンコーダ力 偏差カウンタに対し て DCモータの現在の回転位置がデータとして供給される。  [0104] In the present invention, the excitation method of the stepping motor is not particularly limited. For example, a two-phase excitation method, a one-phase excitation method, or the like can be adopted. In addition, a DC motor may be used instead of the stepping motor. When a DC motor is adopted, the deviation CPU, DZA conversion, and servo amplifier are connected in order to the sub CPU 61, and the DC motor is connected to the servo amplifier. The rotational position of the DC motor is detected by the rotary encoder, and the current rotational position of the DC motor is supplied as data to the rotary encoder force deviation counter.
[0105] また、サブ CPU61には、インデックス検出回路 65と、位置検出変更回路 71とが接続 されている。インデックス検出回路 65は、回転中のリール 14の位置 (後述するインデ ッタス）を検出するものであり、さらに、リール 14の脱調を検出可能である。なお、リー ル 14の回転及び停止の制御については、後で図面を用いて詳述することにする。  Further, an index detection circuit 65 and a position detection change circuit 71 are connected to the sub CPU 61. The index detection circuit 65 detects the position of the rotating reel 14 (index to be described later), and can detect the step-out of the reel 14. The control of the rotation and stop of the reel 14 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.
[0106] 位置変更検出回路 71は、リール 14の回転が停止した後におけるリール 14の停止位 置の変更を検出する。例えば、位置変更検出回路 71は、実際には入賞態様となるシ ンボルの組合せではないにも拘わらず、遊技者により強制的に入賞態様となるシン ボルの組合せになるように停止位置が変更された場合等に係るリール 14の停止位置 の変更を検出する。位置変更検出回路 71は、例えば、リール 14の内側部分に所定 間隔で取り付けられたフィン（図示せず)を検出することにより、リール 14の停止位置 の変更を検出可能に構成されている。 The position change detection circuit 71 detects a change in the stop position of the reel 14 after the rotation of the reel 14 is stopped. For example, in the position change detection circuit 71, the stop position is changed so that the player is forced to have a combination of symbols in a winning mode, even though it is not actually a combination of symbols in a winning mode. Stop position of reel 14 Detect changes. The position change detection circuit 71 is configured to detect a change in the stop position of the reel 14 by detecting fins (not shown) attached to the inner portion of the reel 14 at a predetermined interval, for example.
[0107] ホッパー 66は、キャビネット 11内に設置されていて、メイン CPU41から出力される制 御信号に基づいて、所定数のコインをコイン払出口 19からコイントレイ 18に払い出す 。コイン検出部 67は、コイン払出口 19の内部に設けられていて、コイン払出口 19か ら所定枚数のコインが払い出されたことを検出した場合には、メイン CPU41に対して 入力信号を出力する。 The hopper 66 is installed in the cabinet 11 and pays out a predetermined number of coins from the coin payout opening 19 to the coin tray 18 based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41. The coin detector 67 is provided inside the coin payout exit 19 and outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when it detects that a predetermined number of coins have been paid out from the coin payout exit 19. To do.
[0108] グラフィックボード 68は、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて、上側画 像表示パネル 33及び出力装置としての下側画像表示パネル 16における画像表示 を制御する。下側画像表示パネル 16のクレジット数表示部 31には、 RAM43に記憶 されているクレジット数が表示される。また、下側画像表示パネル 16のペイアウト数表 示部 31には、コインの払出数が表示される。  The graphic board 68 controls image display on the upper image display panel 33 and the lower image display panel 16 as an output device based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41. The number of credits stored in the RAM 43 is displayed in the number-of-credit display section 31 of the lower image display panel 16. Further, the payout number display part 31 of the lower image display panel 16 displays the number of coins paid out.
グラフィックボード 68は、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて画像デ ータを生成する VDP (Video Display Processor)や、 VDPによって生成される画像デ ータを一時的に記憶するビデオ RAM等を備えている。なお、 VDPによって画像デ ータを生成する際に用いられる画像データは、メモリカード 53から読み出されて RA M43に記憶されたゲームプログラム内に含まれて 、る。  The graphic board 68 includes a video display processor (VDP) that generates image data based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data generated by the VDP, and the like. I have. Note that the image data used when generating image data by VDP is included in the game program read from the memory card 53 and stored in the RAM 43.
[0109] 紙幣識別器 22は、紙幣の適否を識別するとともに正規の紙幣をキャビネット 11内に 受け入れる。紙幣識別器 22は、正規の紙幣を受け入れたとき、その紙幣の額に基づ いてメイン CPU41に対して入力信号を出力する。メイン CPU41は、該入力信号によ り伝達された紙幣の額に応じたクレジット数を RAM43に記憶する。  [0109] The bill validator 22 recognizes the suitability of the bill and accepts the regular bill into the cabinet 11. When the bill validator 22 accepts a regular bill, it outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 based on the amount of the bill. The main CPU 41 stores the number of credits corresponding to the amount of bills transmitted by the input signal in the RAM 43.
[0110] チケットプリンタ 35は、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて、 RAM43 に記憶されたクレジット数、 日時や遊技機 10の識別番号等のデータがコード化され たバーコードをチケットに印刷し、バーコード付チケット 39として出力する。 [0110] Based on the control signal output from the main CPU 41, the ticket printer 35 prints on the ticket a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date and time, and identification number of the gaming machine 10 stored in the RAM 43 are encoded. And output as a ticket 39 with barcode.
カードリーダ 36は、スマートカードからのデータを読み取ってメイン CPU41へ送信し たり、メイン CPU41からの制御信号に基づいてスマートカードへのデータの書き込み を行ったりする。キースィッチ 38Sは、キーパッド 38に設けられていて、キーパッド 38 が遊技者によって操作されたとき、所定の入力信号をメイン CPU41へ出力する。デ ータ表示器 37は、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて、カードリーダ 3 6が読み取ったデータや遊技者によってキーパッド 38を介して入力されたデータを 表示する。 The card reader 36 reads data from the smart card and transmits it to the main CPU 41, or writes data to the smart card based on a control signal from the main CPU 41. The key switch 38S is provided on the keypad 38. Is operated by the player, a predetermined input signal is output to the main CPU 41. The data display 37 displays data read by the card reader 36 and data input by the player via the keypad 38 based on the control signal output from the main CPU 41.
[0111] ドア PCB80には、コントローノレパネノレ 20、 リノくータ 21S、コインカウンタ 21C及び冷 陰極管 81が接続されている。コントロールパネル 20には、スピンボタン 23に対応した スピンスィッチ 23S、チェンジボタン 24に対応したチェンジスィッチ 24S、 CASHOU Tボタン 25に対応した CASHOUTスィッチ 25S、 1 BETボタン 26に対応した 1 BETスィッチ 26S、及び、最大 BETボタン 27に対応した最大 BETスィッチ 27Sが設 けられている。各スィッチ 23S〜27Sは、対応するボタン 23〜27が遊技者によって 操作されたとき、メイン CPU41に対して入力信号を出力する。  [0111] To the door PCB 80, a control panel 20, a rein table 21S, a coin counter 21C, and a cold cathode tube 81 are connected. The control panel 20 has a spin switch 23S corresponding to the spin button 23, a change switch 24S corresponding to the change button 24, a CASHOUT switch 25S corresponding to the CASHOU T button 25, a 1 BET switch 26S corresponding to the 1 BET button 26, and The maximum BET switch 27S corresponding to the maximum BET button 27 is provided. Each of the switches 23S to 27S outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when the corresponding button 23 to 27 is operated by the player.
[0112] コインカウンタ 21Cは、コイン受入口 21の内部に設けられていて、遊技者によってコ イン受入口 21に投入されたコインの適否を識別する。正規のコイン以外のものは、コ イン払出口 19から排出される。また、コインカウンタ 21Cは、正規のコインを検出した ときにメイン CPU41に対して入力信号を出力する。  [0112] The coin counter 21C is provided inside the coin receiving slot 21, and identifies whether or not the coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 by the player is appropriate. Coins other than regular coins are discharged from the coin payout exit 19. Further, the coin counter 21C outputs an input signal to the main CPU 41 when it detects a legitimate coin.
[0113] リバータ 21Sは、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて動作するもので あり、コインカウンタ 21Cによって正規のコインとして認識されたコインを、遊技機 10 内に設置されたキャッシュボックス（図示せず)又はホッパー 66に振り分ける。すなわ ち、ホッパー 66がコインで満たされている場合、正規のコインはリバータ 21Sによって キャッシュボックスに振り分けられる。一方、ホッパー 66がコインで満たされていない 場合には、正規のコインはホッパー 66に振り分けられる。冷陰極管 81は、下側画像 表示パネル 16と、上側画像表示パネル 33との背面側に設置されるノ ックライトとして 機能するものであり、メイン CPU41から出力される制御信号に基づいて点灯する。  [0113] The reverter 21S operates based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41, and a coin that is recognized as a regular coin by the coin counter 21C is installed in the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. (Not shown) or hopper 66. That is, when hopper 66 is filled with coins, the regular coins are distributed to the cash box by the reverter 21S. On the other hand, if the hopper 66 is not filled with coins, regular coins are distributed to the hopper 66. The cold cathode tube 81 functions as a knock light installed on the back side of the lower image display panel 16 and the upper image display panel 33 and lights up based on a control signal output from the main CPU 41.
[0114] 図 5は、本発明の一実施形態に係る制御装置の内部構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
制御装置 200は、演算処理装置としての CPU201と、 ROM202と、一時記憶装置と しての RAM203と、通信インターフェイス 204と、ハードディスクドライブ 205とを備え ている。通信インターフェイス 204は、通信回線 101を介して、各遊技機 10の通信ィ ンターフェイス 44と接続されている。 ROM202は、制御装置の動作を制御するため のシステムプログラムや恒久的なデータ等が記憶されている。また、 RAM203は、各 遊技機 10から受信したデータや、演算結果等のデータを一時的に記憶する。また、 ハードディスクドライブ 205には、各遊技機 10の遊技機識別番号に対応付けて、そ の遊技機 10における遊技履歴が記憶される。 The control device 200 includes a CPU 201 as an arithmetic processing device, a ROM 202, a RAM 203 as a temporary storage device, a communication interface 204, and a hard disk drive 205. The communication interface 204 is connected to the communication interface 44 of each gaming machine 10 via the communication line 101. ROM202 controls the operation of the control device System programs and permanent data are stored. The RAM 203 temporarily stores data received from each gaming machine 10 and data such as calculation results. Further, the hard disk drive 205 stores a gaming history in each gaming machine 10 in association with the gaming machine identification number of each gaming machine 10.
[0115] 図 6は、遊技機識別番号と遊技履歴との対応表の一例を模式的に示す図である。  FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a correspondence table between gaming machine identification numbers and gaming history.
各遊技機識別番号には、遊技履歴としての遊技回数、コインの累積投入数、コイン の累積払出数、コインの収支及びコインの還元率が対応付けられている。  Each gaming machine identification number is associated with the number of games as a game history, the cumulative number of coins inserted, the cumulative number of coins paid out, the balance of coins, and the coin return rate.
[0116] さらに、各遊技機識別番号には、遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値が定められて いる。本実施形態では、設定値として" 600"が定められている場合について説明す る。  [0116] Further, for each gaming machine identification number, a set value to be compared with the number of games is defined. In the present embodiment, a case where “600” is set as the set value will be described.
[0117] なお、本発明において、設定値の値及びその数は、特に限定されるものではなぐ適 宜設定することが可能である。また、各遊技機 10に個別に設定値を設定せずに、複 数の遊技機 10に対して一括して設定値を設定することとしてもよい。  [0117] In the present invention, the value of the set value and the number thereof can be appropriately set without being particularly limited. Further, the setting values may be set for a plurality of gaming machines 10 in a lump without setting the setting values individually for each gaming machine 10.
[0118] CPU201は、通信インターフェイス 204を介して、遊技機 10から、投入数及び払出 数と遊技機識別番号とを受信すると、その遊技機識別番号に対応した遊技履歴を更 新する。具体的には、遊技回数を 1加算し、投入数を累積投入数に加算し、払出数 を累積払出数に加算する。さらに、累積投入数及び累積払出数に基づいて、コイン の収支と還元率とを算出する。また、 CPU201は、更新後の遊技回数が、設定値に 達したと判断した場合には、還元指令信号をその遊技機 10に送信する。  [0118] When the CPU 201 receives from the gaming machine 10 the number of inputs, the number of payouts, and the gaming machine identification number from the gaming machine 10 via the communication interface 204, the CPU 201 updates the gaming history corresponding to the gaming machine identification number. Specifically, 1 is added to the number of games, the number of inputs is added to the cumulative number of inputs, and the number of payouts is added to the cumulative number of payouts. In addition, based on the cumulative number of coins to be paid and the cumulative number of coins to be paid out, the cash balance and return rate are calculated. If the CPU 201 determines that the updated number of games has reached the set value, the CPU 201 transmits a return command signal to the gaming machine 10.
[0119] 次に、遊技機 10において行われる処理について説明する。  Next, processing performed in the gaming machine 10 will be described.
図 7は、図 4に示したマザ一ボード 40とゲーミングボード 50とによるゲームプログラム 及びゲームシステムプログラムの認証読取処理の手順を示したチャートである。なお 、ゲーミングボード 50におけるカードスロット 53Sには、メモリカード 53が差し込まれ、 ICソケット 54Sには、 GAL54が取り付けられているものとする。  FIG. 7 is a chart showing the procedure of the authentication reading process of the game program and game system program by the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 shown in FIG. It is assumed that the memory card 53 is inserted into the card slot 53S of the gaming board 50, and the GAL 54 is attached to the IC socket 54S.
[0120] まず、電源ユニット 45において電源スィッチの投入 (電源の投入）が行われると、マザ 一ボード 40及びゲーミングボード 50を起動する（ステップ S1— 1、 S2— 1)。マザ一 ボード 40及びゲーミングボード 50が起動すると、それぞれ別個の処理が並行して行 われる。すなわち、ゲーミングボード 50では、 CPU51力 ブート ROM52に格納され て 、る予備認証プログラムの読み出しを行 、、その読み出した予備認証プログラムに 従 、、マザ一ボード 40への取込前に予め認証プログラムの改竄が行われて!/、な!/、こ とを確認及び証明する予備認証を行う（ステップ S2— 2)。一方、マザ一ボード 40で は、メイン CPU41が、 ROM42に格納されている BIOSを実行して、 BIOSに組み込 まれている圧縮データを RAM43に展開する（ステップ S1— 2)。そして、メイン CPU 41は、 RAM43に展開された BIOSを実行し、各種周辺装置の診断と初期化とを行う (ステップ S1— 3)。 First, when the power switch is turned on (power is turned on) in the power unit 45, the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 are activated (steps S1-1 and S2-1). When the mother board 40 and the gaming board 50 are activated, separate processes are performed in parallel. That is, in the gaming board 50, the CPU 51 is stored in the boot ROM 52. The pre-authentication program is read out, and the pre-authentication program is falsified in advance according to the read pre-authentication program before loading it into the motherboard 40! /, Na! /, Pre-authentication is performed to confirm and certify (step S2-2). On the other hand, in the mother board 40, the main CPU 41 executes the BIOS stored in the ROM 42 and expands the compressed data incorporated in the BIOS into the RAM 43 (step S1-2). Then, the main CPU 41 executes the BIOS expanded in the RAM 43, and diagnoses and initializes various peripheral devices (step S1-3).
[0121] すると、メイン CPU41には、 PCIバスを介して、ゲーミングボード 50の ROM55が接 続されているので、メイン CPU41は、 ROM55に格納されている認証プログラムの読 み出しを行うとともに、読み出した認証プログラムを RAM43に記憶させる処理を行う (ステップ S1— 4)。このとき、メイン CPU41は、 BIOSの標準 BIOSの機能に従い、 A DDSUM方式 (標準チェック機能）によるチェックサムを取り、格納が間違いなく行わ れるか否かの確認処理を行 、ながら、認証プログラムを RAM43に記憶させる。  [0121] Then, since the ROM 55 of the gaming board 50 is connected to the main CPU 41 via the PCI bus, the main CPU 41 reads and reads the authentication program stored in the ROM 55. The authentication program is stored in the RAM 43 (step S1-4). At this time, the main CPU 41 takes the checksum by the A DDSUM method (standard check function) according to the standard BIOS function of the BIOS and checks whether or not the storage is performed without fail, while the authentication program is stored in the RAM43. Remember me.
[0122] 次に、メイン CPU41は、 IDEバスに何が接続されているのかを確認した上で、 IDE バスを介してカードスロット 53Sに差し込まれているメモリカード 53にアクセスし、メモ リカード 53から、ゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムの読み出しを行う。 この場合、メイン CPU41は、ゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムを構成 するデータを 4バイトずつ読み出す。続いて、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶され た認証プログラムに従 、、読み出したゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラム の改竄が行われて ヽな 、ことを確認及び証明する認証を行う（ステップ S 1— 5)。この 認証処理が正常に終了すると、メイン CPU41は、認証対象となった (認証された)ゲ ームプログラム及びゲームシステムプログラムを RAM43に書き込み記憶させる（ステ ップ S1— 6)。次に、メイン CPU41は、 PCIバスを介して ICソケット 54Sに取り付けら れている GAL54にアクセスし、 GAL54から、ペイアウト率設定用データを読み込み 、 RAM43に書き込み記憶させる（ステップ S 1— 7)。次に、メイン CPU41は、 PCIバ スを介して、ゲーミングボード 50の ROM55に格納されている国識別情報の読み出 しを行うとともに、読み出した国識別情報を RAM43に記憶させる処理を行う（ステツ プ S1— 8)。 [0123] 上述した処理を行った後、メイン CPU41は、ゲームプログラム及びゲームシステムプ ログラムを順次読み出して実行することにより、遊技を進行させる。 [0122] Next, after confirming what is connected to the IDE bus, the main CPU 41 accesses the memory card 53 inserted into the card slot 53S via the IDE bus, and starts from the memory card 53. The game program and the game system program are read out. In this case, the main CPU 41 reads out the data constituting the game program and the game system program 4 bytes at a time. Subsequently, according to the authentication program stored in the RAM 43, the main CPU 41 performs authentication for confirming and verifying that the read game program and game system program have been falsified (step S 1-5). ). When this authentication process is completed normally, the main CPU 41 writes and stores the game program and game system program to be authenticated (authenticated) in the RAM 43 (step S1-6). Next, the main CPU 41 accesses the GAL 54 attached to the IC socket 54S via the PCI bus, reads the payout rate setting data from the GAL 54, and writes and stores it in the RAM 43 (step S1-7). Next, the main CPU 41 reads out the country identification information stored in the ROM 55 of the gaming board 50 via the PCI bus, and performs a process of storing the read country identification information in the RAM 43 (step S100). S1-8). [0123] After performing the processing described above, the main CPU 41 advances the game by sequentially reading and executing the game program and the game system program.
[0124] 図 7に示した処理が行われた後、メイン CPU41は、遊技モード選択処理を行う。  After the process shown in FIG. 7 is performed, the main CPU 41 performs a game mode selection process.
図 8は、遊技モード選択処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the game mode selection process.
なお、メイン CPU41は、このサブルーチンを実行している間に、コイン受入口 21に 投入されたコインがコインカウンタ 21Cによって検出された際にコインカウンタ 21Cか ら出力される検出信号を受信したとき、割込処理として、 RAM43に記憶されたクレジ ット数を加算する処理を行う。  When the main CPU 41 receives a detection signal output from the coin counter 21C when the coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 is detected by the coin counter 21C while executing this subroutine, As an interrupt process, a process of adding the number of credits stored in the RAM 43 is performed.
図 9 (a)〜 (b)は、遊技モード選択処理が実行されるときに下側画像表示パネルに表 示される画像を示す図である。  FIGS. 9A to 9B are diagrams showing images displayed on the lower image display panel when the game mode selection process is executed.
[0125] まず、メイン CPU41は、遊技モードの選択を遊技者に対して要求するための画像を 下側画像表示パネル 16に表示する処理を行う（ステップ S3)。この処理において、メ イン CPU41は、遊技モード選択画像の描画命令をグラフィックボード 68に送信する 。グラフィックボードでは、上記描画命令に基づいて、 VDPが画像データを RAM43 力 抽出してビデオ RAMに展開し、 1フレームの画像データを生成し、この画像デ ータを下側画像表示パネル 16に出力する。その結果、下側画像表示パネル 16には 、例えば、図 9 (a)に示すような画像が表示される。  [0125] First, the main CPU 41 performs processing for displaying an image for requesting the player to select a game mode on the lower image display panel 16 (step S3). In this process, the main CPU 41 transmits a drawing command for a game mode selection image to the graphic board 68. On the graphic board, based on the above drawing command, VDP extracts the image data from RAM43 and expands it to video RAM to generate one frame of image data, which is output to the lower image display panel 16 To do. As a result, for example, an image as shown in FIG. 9A is displayed on the lower image display panel 16.
[0126] 図 9 (a)は、下側画像表示パネルに表示される遊技モード選択画像の一例を示す図 である。図中、 15 (15L、 15C、 15R)は、表示窓を示している。下側画像表示パネル 16の上部には、「Select a mode！ ！」を示す画像が表示されている。この画像は 、遊技者に遊技モードの選択を要求するための画像である。また、下側画像表示パ ネル 16の下部には、「INSURANCE」、「NO INSURANCEを示す画像が表示 されている。これらの画像は、遊技モードの選択肢を示す画像であり、遊技者は、い ずれかの画像の表示領域に対応するタツチパネル 69の所定箇所に触れることにより 、遊技モードを選択する旨の指示を入力することができる。  FIG. 9 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a game mode selection image displayed on the lower image display panel. In the figure, 15 (15L, 15C, 15R) indicates a display window. On the upper part of the lower image display panel 16, an image indicating “Select a mode!” Is displayed. This image is an image for requesting the player to select a game mode. In addition, images indicating “INSURANCE” and “NO INSURANCE” are displayed at the bottom of the lower image display panel 16. These images indicate game mode options. By touching a predetermined part of the touch panel 69 corresponding to the display area of any image, an instruction to select the game mode can be input.
[0127] 選択肢「INSURANCE」は、保険有モードに対応している。保険有モードを選択す るためには、所定 (例えば 1ドル相当）のクレジット数が必要となる。なお、クレジット数 にかえて、それに相当する紙幣又はコインが投入されてもよい。保険有モードが選択 された場合、その後、ボーナスゲームが発生することなく遊技回数が設定値 (600)に 達すると、還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされ、還元モードに移行する。還元モー ドでは、ボーナスゲームの発生する確率が相対的に高くなり、ボーナスゲームが発生 するまで還元モードが継続する。すなわち、保険有モードでは、長時間にわたってボ 一ナスゲームが発生しな力つた場合に生じる損失の全部又は一部を補填するための 保険を掛けた状態で、遊技を行うことができるのである。一方、選択肢「NO INSUR ANCE」は、保険無モードに対応している。保険無モードが選択された場合、その後 、長期間にわたってボーナスゲームが発生しな力つたとしても、還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされることはなぐ還元モードに移行することもない。 [0127] The option "INSURANCE" corresponds to the insurance mode. In order to select the insurance mode, a predetermined number of credits (e.g., equivalent to $ 1) is required. Instead of the number of credits, a corresponding bill or coin may be inserted. Insurance mode is selected Then, when the number of games reaches the set value (600) without generating a bonus game, the return mode flag is set to “ON” and the mode shifts to the return mode. In the return mode, the probability of the bonus game occurring is relatively high, and the return mode continues until the bonus game occurs. In other words, in the insurance mode, the game can be performed with insurance for covering all or part of the loss caused when the bonus game is not generated for a long time. On the other hand, the option “NO INSUR ANCE” corresponds to the non-insurance mode. When the non-insurance mode is selected, the return mode flag is not set to “ON” and the return mode is not entered even if the bonus game is not generated for a long period of time.
[0128] ステップ S3の処理の後、メイン CPU41は、保険有モードが選択された力否かを判断 する (ステップ S4)。保険有モードが選択されたと判断した場合には、メイン CPU41 は、 RAM43に記憶されたクレジット数力も所定数を減算する処理を行う（ステップ S5 )。その後、保険有モード時における遊技実行処理を行う（ステップ S6)。  [0128] After the process of step S3, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the insurance mode is selected (step S4). If it is determined that the insurance mode is selected, the main CPU 41 performs a process of subtracting a predetermined number from the credit power stored in the RAM 43 (step S5). Thereafter, game execution processing in the insurance mode is performed (step S6).
この処理については後で図 10を用いて詳述する力 保険有モードでは、図 9 (b)に 示すように、下側画像表示パネル 16の左上に、「INSURED」を示す画像が表示さ れる。この画像は、遊技モードが保険有モードであることを示す画像である。  As shown in Fig. 9 (b), an image showing "INSURED" is displayed at the upper left of the lower image display panel 16 in the power insurance mode, which will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 10. . This image is an image indicating that the game mode is the insurance mode.
[0129] 一方、ステップ S4にお 、て、保険無モードが選択されたと判断した場合、メイン CPU 41は、保険無モード時における遊技実行処理を行う（ステップ S7)。この処理は、還 元モード移行に係る処理と、遊技回数の計数に係る処理とが行われな 、ことを除 ヽ て、保険有モード時における遊技実行処理（図 10参照）と略同様の処理であるから、 ここでの説明は省略する。ステップ S6又は S7の処理を実行した場合には、その後、 ステップ S3に処理を戻す。  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4 that the non-insurance mode has been selected, the main CPU 41 performs a game execution process in the non-insurance mode (step S7). This process is substantially the same as the game execution process in the insurance mode (see FIG. 10), except that the process related to the return mode and the process related to counting the number of games are not performed. Therefore, explanation here is omitted. When the process of step S6 or S7 is executed, the process returns to step S3.
[0130] 図 10は、図 8に示したサブルーチンのステップ S6において呼び出されて実行される 保険有モード時の遊技実行処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the game execution process in the insurance mode that is called and executed in step S6 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
遊技実行処理においては、まず、メイン CPU41は、コインが BETされたか否かを判 断する（ステップ S10)。この処理において、メイン CPU41は、 1— BETボタン 26が 操作された際に 1— BETスィッチ 26Sから出力される入力信号、又は、最大 BETボ タン 27が操作された際に最大 BETスィッチ 27Sから出力される入力信号を受信した か否かを判断する。コインが BETされていないと判断した場合、ステップ S 10に処理 を戻す。 In the game execution process, first, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a coin has been bet (step S10). In this process, the main CPU 41 outputs the input signal output from the 1- BET switch 26S when the 1- BET button 26 is operated, or the maximum BET switch 27S when the maximum BET button 27 is operated. Received input signal Determine whether or not. If it is determined that no coin is bet, the process returns to step S10.
[0131] 一方、ステップ S10において、コインが BETされたと判断した場合、メイン CPU41は 、 BETされたコインの枚数に応じて、 RAM43に記憶されたクレジット数を減算する処 理を行う（ステップ Sl l)。なお、 BETされるコインの枚数が RAM43に記憶されたク レジット数より多い場合には、 RAM43に記憶されたクレジット数を減算する処理を行 わずに、ステップ S10に処理を戻す。また、 BETされるコインの枚数が、 1回の遊技に BETすることが可能な上限値 (本実施形態では 50枚)を超える場合には、 RAM43 に記憶されたクレジット数を減算する処理を行わずに、ステップ S12に処理を進める  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10 that a coin has been betted, the main CPU 41 performs a process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 43 according to the number of coins betted (step Sl l). ). If the number of coins to be bet is larger than the number of credits stored in the RAM 43, the process returns to step S10 without performing the process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 43. In addition, when the number of coins bet exceeds the upper limit value (50 in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game, the number of credits stored in the RAM 43 is subtracted. Without proceeding to step S12
[0132] 次に、メイン CPU41は、スピンボタン 23が ONされたか否かを判断する（ステップ S1 2)。この処理において、メイン CPU41は、スピンボタン 23が押下された際にスピンス イッチ 23Sから出力される入力信号を受信した力否かを判断する。 [0132] Next, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S12). In this process, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not it has received an input signal output from the spin switch 23S when the spin button 23 is pressed.
スピンボタン 23が ONされていないと判断した場合、ステップ S 10に処理を戻す。な お、スピンボタン 23が ONされなかった場合（例えば、スピンボタン 23が ONされずに 遊技を終了する旨の指示が入力された場合）には、メイン CPU41は、ステップ S11 における減算結果をキャンセルする。  If it is determined that the spin button 23 is not turned ON, the process returns to step S10. If the spin button 23 is not turned on (for example, if an instruction to end the game is input without the spin button 23 being turned on), the main CPU 41 cancels the subtraction result in step S11. To do.
[0133] 本実施形態では、コインが BETされた後（ステップ S 10)、スピンボタン 23が ONされ た力否かの判断 (ステップ S 12)を行う前に、クレジット数を減算する処理 (ステップ S1 1)を行う場合について説明する。ただし、本発明は、この例に限定されるものではな い。例えば、コインが BETされた後（ステップ S 10)、スピンボタン 23が ONされたか否 かの判断 (ステップ S 12)を行い、スピンボタン 23が ONされたと判断した場合 (ステツ プ S 12： YES)、クレジット数を減算する処理 (ステップ S 11)を行うこととしてもよ！/、。  In the present embodiment, after the coin is bet (step S 10), the process of subtracting the number of credits (step S 12) is performed before determining whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S 12). A case where S1 1) is performed will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, after a coin is bet (step S10), it is determined whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S12), and if it is determined that the spin button 23 is turned on (step S12: YES) ), You can also perform the process of subtracting the number of credits (step S11)! /.
[0134] 一方、図 10のステップ S12において、スピンボタン 23が ONされたと判断した場合、 メイン CPU41は、抽選処理を行う（ステップ S13)。この抽選処理において、メイン CP U41 (演算処理装置）は、 RAM43 (記憶装置）に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行 することにより、各リール 14の停止時におけるコード No.を決定する。これにより、停 止表示されるシンボルの組合せが決定される。この処理については、後で図 11〜図 12を用いて詳述することにする。ステップ S 13の処理を実行するとき、メイン CPU41 は、抽選により役を決定する役決定手段として機能する。なお、本実施形態では、停 止表示されるシンボルの組合せを決定することにより、複数種類の役の中から 1つの 役を決定する場合について説明するが、本発明においては、例えば、先ず抽選によ つて、複数種類の役の中から選ばれる 1つの役を決定し、その後に、停止表示される シンボルの組合せを上記役に基づ 、て決定することとしてもょ 、。 On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12 of FIG. 10 that the spin button 23 has been turned ON, the main CPU 41 performs a lottery process (step S13). In this lottery process, the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) determines a code number when each reel 14 is stopped by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 43 (storage unit). Thereby, the combination of symbols to be stopped is determined. This process will be described later in Fig. 11 to Fig. 12 will be used to explain in detail. When executing the processing of step S13, the main CPU 41 functions as a combination determining means for determining a combination by lottery. In the present embodiment, a case is described in which one combination is determined from a plurality of types of combinations by determining a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed. In the present invention, for example, first, a lottery is selected. Therefore, it is possible to determine one combination selected from multiple types of combinations, and then determine the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed based on the above combination.
[0135] 次に、メイン CPU41は、リールの回転制御処理を行う（ステップ S 14)。この処理は、 全リール 14の回転を開始した後、ステップ S 13にお 、て決定された役に対応したシ ンボルの組合せが入賞ライン L上に停止表示されるように、各リールの回転を停止さ せる処理である。この処理については、後で図 13〜図 15を用いて詳述することにす る。 Next, the main CPU 41 performs reel rotation control processing (step S 14). In this process, after all reels 14 have started rotating, each reel is rotated so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination determined in step S13 is stopped and displayed on the winning line L. It is a process to stop. This process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.
[0136] 次に、メイン CPU41は、ボーナスゲームトリガーが成立したか否か、すなわち、表示 窓 15内に「APPLE」が停止表示された力否かを判断する（ステップ S 15)。ボーナス ゲームトリガーが成立したと判断した場合には、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）は、ボ 一ナスゲームを行うためのプログラムを RAM43 (記憶装置）力 読み出してボーナス ゲーム処理を実行する (ステップ S 16)。このとき、第 1特別遊技状態が発生したことに なる。ボーナスゲーム処理については、後で図 16を詳述することにする。ステップ S1 6の処理を実行するとき、メイン CPU41は、第 1特別遊技状態を発生させる手段とし て機能する。  Next, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a bonus game trigger has been established, that is, whether or not “APPLE” is stopped and displayed in the display window 15 (step S 15). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) reads the program for executing the bonus game from the RAM 43 (storage unit) and executes bonus game processing (step S 16 ). At this time, the first special gaming state has occurred. The bonus game process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When executing the processing of step S16, the main CPU 41 functions as a means for generating the first special gaming state.
[0137] 一方、ボーナスゲームトリガーが成立していないと判断した場合、メイン CPU41は、 役が成立した力否かを判断する (ステップ S17)。役が成立したと判断した場合、メイ ン CPU41は、投入数及び役に応じたコインの払い出しを行う（ステップ S18)。  On the other hand, when determining that the bonus game trigger has not been established, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the winning combination has been achieved (step S17). If it is determined that a winning combination has been established, the main CPU 41 pays out coins according to the number of inserted coins and the winning combination (step S18).
コインの貯留を行う場合、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶されたクレジット数をカロ 算する処理を行う。一方、コインの払い出しを行う場合には、メイン CPU41は、ホッパ 一 66に制御信号を送信して所定数のコインの払い出しを行う。その際、コイン検出部 67は、ホッパー 66から払い出されるコインの枚数を計数し、その計数値が指定され た数に達したときに、払出完了信号をメイン CPU41に送信する。これにより、メイン C PU41は、ホッパー 66の駆動を停止し、コインの払出処理を終了する。 [0138] ステップ SI 6若しくは SI 8の処理を実行した場合、又は、ステップ S17において、い ずれの役も成立していないと判断した場合 (ハズレであると判断した場合）、メイン CP U41は、 RAM43に格納された還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされているか否か を判断する（ステップ S19)。還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされていると判断した 場合、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）は、還元モードに移行するためのプログラムを RAM43 (記憶装置)力 読み出して還元モード処理を実行し、還元モードに移行す る (ステップ S20)。このとき、第 2特別遊技状態が発生したことになる。還元モード処 理については、後で図 17を用いて詳述することにする。ステップ S20の処理を実行 するとき、メイン CPU41は、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段として機能する。 When storing coins, the main CPU 41 performs a process of calculating the number of credits stored in the RAM 43. On the other hand, when paying out coins, the main CPU 41 sends a control signal to the hopper 66 to pay out a predetermined number of coins. At that time, the coin detecting unit 67 counts the number of coins paid out from the hopper 66, and transmits a payout completion signal to the main CPU 41 when the counted value reaches a designated number. Thus, the main CPU 41 stops driving the hopper 66 and ends the coin payout process. [0138] When the processing of step SI 6 or SI 8 is executed, or when it is determined in step S17 that any combination is not established (when it is determined that the player has lost), the main CPU 41 It is determined whether or not the return mode flag stored in the RAM 43 is set to “ON” (step S19). When it is determined that the reduction mode flag is set to “ON”, the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) reads the program for shifting to the reduction mode from the RAM 43 (storage device), executes the reduction mode process, Transition to reduction mode (step S20). At this time, the second special gaming state has occurred. The reduction mode process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. When executing the process of step S20, the main CPU 41 functions as a means for generating the second special gaming state.
[0139] ステップ S20の処理を実行した場合、又は、ステップ S 19において還元モードフラグ 力 S"ON"にセットされていないと判断した場合、メイン CPU41は、ボーナスゲーム実 行 (ステップ S16)又は還元モード移行 (ステップ S20)を行ったか否かを判断する (ス テツプ S21)。  [0139] When the process of step S20 is executed, or when it is determined in step S19 that the return mode flag force S is not set to "ON", the main CPU 41 executes the bonus game (step S16) or returns. It is determined whether or not a mode transition (step S20) has been performed (step S21).
[0140] ボーナスゲーム実行又は還元モード移行を行っていないと判断した場合、メイン CP U41は、計数処理を実行する (ステップ S22)。  [0140] If it is determined that the bonus game is not executed or the return mode is not shifted, the main CPU 41 executes a counting process (step S22).
計数処理は、遊技機 10と制御装置 200との間で行われる処理である。遊技機 10か ら、 1回の遊技における投入数及び払出数を遊技機識別番号とともに制御装置 200 に送信する。制御装置 200においては、遊技機識別番号ごとに遊技回数、累積投入 数、累積払出数等が更新される。  The counting process is a process performed between the gaming machine 10 and the control device 200. From the gaming machine 10, the number of insertions and withdrawals in one game is transmitted to the control device 200 together with the gaming machine identification number. In the control device 200, the number of games, the cumulative number of inputs, the cumulative number of payouts, etc. are updated for each gaming machine identification number.
[0141] そして、遊技回数が設定値に達した場合には、還元指令信号が制御装置 200から遊 技機 10に送信される。メイン CPU41は、上記還元指令信号を受信すると、還元モー ドフラグを" ON"にセットする。なお、計数処理については、後で図 19を用いて詳述 することにする。ステップ S 22の処理を実行した後、メイン CPU41は、ステップ S10に 処理を戻し、弓 Iき続 、て保険有モードにぉ 、て遊技を実行する。  [0141] Then, when the number of games reaches the set value, a return command signal is transmitted from the control device 200 to the gaming machine 10. When the main CPU 41 receives the above reduction command signal, the main CPU 41 sets the reduction mode flag to “ON”. The counting process will be described in detail later using FIG. After executing the process of step S22, the main CPU 41 returns the process to step S10, continues the bow I, enters the insurance mode, and executes the game.
[0142] 一方、ボーナスゲーム実行又は還元モード移行を行ったと判断した場合、本サブル 一チンを終了し、図 8に処理を戻す。その結果、遊技者は、再度、遊技モードを保険 有モードとする力保険無モードとするかの選択を行うことができる。  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus game has been executed or the return mode has been entered, this subroutine is terminated and the processing returns to FIG. As a result, the player can select again whether to change the game mode to the insurance mode or the power insurance non-insurance mode.
[0143] 図 11は、図 10に示したサブルーチンのステップ S13において呼び出されて実行され る抽選処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。この処理は、 RAM43に記 憶された抽選プログラムをメイン CPU41が実行することによって行われる処理である まず、メイン CPU41は、抽選プログラムに含まれる乱数発生用プログラムを実行する ことにより、 0〜255の数値範囲の中から、 3つのリール 14の夫々に対応する乱数値 を選択する (ステップ S31)。本実施形態では、プログラム上で乱数を発生させる場合 (所謂ソフトウェア乱数を用いる場合）について説明する。ただし、本発明においては 、乱数発生器を設けておいて該乱数発生器カゝら乱数を抽出する (所謂ハードウェア 舌 L数を用いる）こととしてちょ 、。 [0143] FIG. 11 is called and executed in step S13 of the subroutine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a lottery process. This process is a process performed by the main CPU 41 executing the lottery program stored in the RAM 43. First, the main CPU 41 executes a random number generation program included in the lottery program to set 0 to 255. A random number corresponding to each of the three reels 14 is selected from the numerical value range (step S31). In the present embodiment, a case where random numbers are generated on a program (a case where so-called software random numbers are used) will be described. However, in the present invention, a random number generator is provided and random numbers are extracted from the random number generator (so-called hardware tongue L number is used).
[0144] 次に、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）は、 GAL54から出力されて RAM43 (記憶装 置）に記憶されたペイアウト率設定用データに応じたシンボル重み付けデータを参照 し、選択された 3つの乱数値に基づいて、各リール 14のコード No. (図 3参照）を決定 する（ステップ S32)。各リール 14のコード No.は、入賞ライン L上に停止表示される シンボルのコード No.に対応している。メイン CPU41は、各リール 14のコード No.を 決定することにより、役を決定する。例えば、各リール 14のコード No.を" 00"、 "00" 、 "00"に決定した場合、メイン CPU41は、役を「JACKPOT 7」に決定したことにな る。なお、このリールのコード No.に基づいて、後述するリールの回転制御処理が行 われる。このとき、メイン CPU41は、役決定手段として機能する。  [0144] Next, the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) refers to the symbol weighting data corresponding to the payout rate setting data output from the GAL 54 and stored in the RAM 43 (storage unit), and selects the selected three Based on the random value, the code number (see Fig. 3) of each reel 14 is determined (step S32). The code number of each reel 14 corresponds to the code number of the symbol stopped on the winning line L. The main CPU 41 determines the combination by determining the code number of each reel 14. For example, when the code numbers of the reels 14 are determined as “00”, “00”, and “00”, the main CPU 41 determines the role as “JACKPOT 7”. A reel rotation control process, which will be described later, is performed based on the reel code number. At this time, the main CPU 41 functions as a combination determining means.
[0145] ここで、本実施形態における役について説明する。  Here, a combination in the present embodiment will be described.
図 12は、本実施形態における複数種類の役と各役の成立可能性及び払出数との関 係を説明するための図である。図 12に示す各役の成立可能性は、ボーナスゲーム 以外におけるペイアウト率が 88%である場合のものである。なお、図中に示す成立 可能性は、シンボル重み付けデータを参照して 3つの乱数値に基づいて、各リール 1 4のコード No.を決定した場合に、当該役が成立する可能性を示すものである。すな わち、各役に対して乱数値が対応付けられて 、るものではな 、。  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of combinations, the possibility of establishment of each combination, and the number of payouts in the present embodiment. The possibility of winning for each combination shown in FIG. 12 is for a case where the payout rate other than the bonus game is 88%. The possibility of establishment shown in the figure indicates the possibility that the combination will be established when the code number of each reel 14 is determined based on three random numbers with reference to the symbol weighting data. It is. In other words, a random number value is associated with each role.
[0146] ボーナスゲームトリガーの成立可能性は、 0. 5%である。ボーナスゲームトリガーに 当選すると、「APPLE」のシンボルが入賞ライン上に 3つ停止表示され、ボーナスゲ ームが発生する。ボーナスゲームでは、抽選によって定められた回数のフリーゲーム を実行する。 [0146] The probability of establishing a bonus game trigger is 0.5%. If you win the bonus game trigger, three “APPLE” symbols will be stopped on the winning line and a bonus game will occur. In the bonus game, the number of free games determined by lottery Execute.
[0147] rjACKPOT 7」の成立可能性は 0. 5%である。この役が成立すると、「JACKPOT  [0147] The probability of establishment of rjACKPOT 7 is 0.5%. When this role is established, "JACKPOT
7」のシンボルが入賞ライン L上に 3つ停止表示され、コイン投入数 1枚あたり 30枚 のコインが払い出される。成立可能性は低い役ほど、払出数は多く設定されている。 ただし、図 12に示した役のいずれの組合せにもならないシンボルの組合せが停止表 示された場合は、ハズレであり、コインの払い出しは行われない。  Three “7” symbols are displayed on the winning line L, and 30 coins are paid out per coin inserted. The number of payouts is set higher as the role is less likely to be established. However, if a combination of symbols that cannot be any combination of the combinations shown in FIG. 12 is stopped, it is a loss and no coins are paid out.
[0148] 図 13は、図 10に示したサブルーチンのステップ S 15において呼び出されて実行され るリール回転制御処理を示すフローチャートである。なお、この処理は、メイン CPU4 1とサブ CPU61との間で行われる処理である。  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation control process that is called and executed in step S 15 of the subroutine shown in FIG. This process is a process performed between the main CPU 41 and the sub CPU 61.
[0149] まず、メイン CPU41は、サブ CPU61に対して、リールの回転を開始させる旨のスタ ート信号を送信する（ステップ S40)。サブ CPU61は、メイン CPU41からスタート信 号を受信すると、リール回転処理を行う（ステップ S51)。この処理において、サブ CP U61は、モータ駆動回路 62にパルスを供給する。サブ CPU61から出力されたパル スは、ドライノく 64によって増幅され、各ステッピングモータ 70 (70L、 70C、 70R)に 供給される。その結果、各ステッピングモータ 70が回転し、それに伴って各リール 14 ( 14L、 14C、 14R)が回転する。 1—2相励磁方式のステッピングモータ 70は、ステツ プ角が 0. 9° であり、 1回転あたりのステップ数力 00である。従って、 400個のノ レ スがステッピングモータ 70に供給されると、リール 14は 1回転する。  First, the main CPU 41 transmits a start signal for starting reel rotation to the sub CPU 61 (step S40). When the sub CPU 61 receives the start signal from the main CPU 41, the sub CPU 61 performs reel rotation processing (step S51). In this process, the sub CPU 61 supplies a pulse to the motor drive circuit 62. The pulse output from the sub CPU 61 is amplified by the dry-coil 64 and supplied to each stepping motor 70 (70L, 70C, 70R). As a result, each stepping motor 70 rotates and each reel 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) rotates accordingly. The stepping motor 70 of the 1-2 phase excitation method has a step angle of 0.9 ° and a step force of 00 per revolution. Therefore, when 400 nores are supplied to the stepping motor 70, the reel 14 makes one rotation.
[0150] リール 14の回転開始時には、サブ CPU206は、周波数が低いパルスをモータ駆動 回路 62に供給し、次第にノ ルスの周波数を高くしていく。それに伴って、リール 14の 回転速度が大きくなる。そして、所定の時間が経過すると、パルスの周波数を一定に する。その結果、リール 14が定速で回転する。  [0150] At the start of rotation of the reel 14, the sub CPU 206 supplies a low frequency pulse to the motor drive circuit 62, and gradually increases the frequency of the noise. Along with this, the rotation speed of the reel 14 increases. When a predetermined time elapses, the pulse frequency is made constant. As a result, the reel 14 rotates at a constant speed.
[0151] ここで、リール 14の回転動作について図 14を用いて説明する。  Here, the rotation operation of the reel 14 will be described with reference to FIG.
図 14 (a)〜（d)は、リール 14の回転動作について説明するための側面図である。 図 14 (a)に示すように、リール 14の側面には、半円形状の金属板 14aが設けられて いる。金属板 14aは、リール 14とともに回転する。また、リール 14の周面には 22個の シンボル（図 3参照）が設けられている。リール 14の周面に描かれた 22個のシンボル のうち、 3個のシンボル力 リール 14の前方に形成された表示窓 15を介して視認可 能となる。図中、太線の矢印は、リール 14の回転方向を示している。また、リール 14 の側方には、近接センサ 65aが設けられている。近接センサ 65aは、金属板 14aを検 出するためのものである。近接センサ 65aは、リール 14が回転しても、移動したり回転 したりすることはない。 FIGS. 14A to 14D are side views for explaining the rotation operation of the reel 14. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the side surface of the reel 14 is provided with a semicircular metal plate 14a. The metal plate 14a rotates together with the reel 14. In addition, 22 symbols (see FIG. 3) are provided on the peripheral surface of the reel 14. Out of the 22 symbols drawn on the circumference of the reel 14, 3 symbol power is approved through the display window 15 formed in front of the reel 14. It becomes ability. In the figure, a thick arrow indicates the rotation direction of the reel 14. A proximity sensor 65a is provided on the side of the reel. The proximity sensor 65a is for detecting the metal plate 14a. The proximity sensor 65a does not move or rotate even when the reel 14 rotates.
[0152] 図 14 (a)には、近接センサ 65aによって金属板 14aが検出され始める時点の金属板 14aの位置（以下、位置 Aともいう）を示している。金属板 14aが位置 Aにあるときにリ ール 14が回転すると、金属板 14aは、図 14 (b)に示した位置に移動する。図 14 (b) には、近接センサ 65aによって金属板 14aが検出されているときの金属板 14aの位置 (以下、位置 Bともいう）を示している。金属板 14aが位置 Bにあるときにリール 14が回 転すると、金属板 14aは、図 14 (c)に示した位置に移動する。図 14 (c)には、近接セ ンサ 65aによって金属板 14aが検出されなくなる時点の金属板 14aの位置（以下、位 置 Cともいう）を示している。  FIG. 14 (a) shows the position (hereinafter also referred to as position A) of the metal plate 14a when the proximity sensor 65a starts detecting the metal plate 14a. When the reel 14 rotates while the metal plate 14a is at the position A, the metal plate 14a moves to the position shown in FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14 (b) shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter also referred to as position B) when the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a. When the reel 14 rotates while the metal plate 14a is at the position B, the metal plate 14a moves to the position shown in FIG. 14 (c). FIG. 14 (c) shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter also referred to as position C) when the metal plate 14a is no longer detected by the proximity sensor 65a.
[0153] 金属板 14aが位置 Cにあるときにリール 14が回転すると、金属板 14aは、図 14 (d)に 示した位置に移動する。図 14 (d)には、近接センサ 65aによって金属板 14aが検出 されていないときの金属板 14aの位置（以下、位置 Dともいう）を示している。さらにリ ール 14が回転すると、金属板 14aの位置は、位置 Aに戻る。上述したように、リール 1 4の回転に伴って、金属板 14aの位置は、位置 A、位置 B、位置 C、位置 D、位置 A、 · · ·の順に変化する。  When the reel 14 rotates while the metal plate 14a is at the position C, the metal plate 14a moves to the position shown in FIG. 14 (d). FIG. 14 (d) shows the position of the metal plate 14a (hereinafter, also referred to as position D) when the metal plate 14a is not detected by the proximity sensor 65a. When the reel 14 further rotates, the position of the metal plate 14a returns to the position A. As described above, as the reel 14 rotates, the position of the metal plate 14a changes in the order of position A, position B, position C, position D, position A,.
[0154] 近接センサ 65aは、インデックス検出回路 65 (図 3参照）を構成するものである。近接 センサ 65aが金属板 14aを検出している状態を" High"、近接センサ 65aが金属板 1 4aを検出して!/、な!/、状態を" Low"とすると、金属板 14aが位置 A→位置 B→位置 C にあるとき、インデックス検出回路 65の状態は" High"であり、金属板 14aが位置 C→ 位置 D→位置 Aにあるとき、インデックス検出回路 65の状態は" Low"である。なお、 サブ CPU61は、 "Low"から" High"への立ち上がりをインデックス（原点） 1とし、 "Hi gh"から" Low"への立下りをインデックス（原点） 2として、リール 14の回転位置を認 識する。  [0154] The proximity sensor 65a constitutes the index detection circuit 65 (see Fig. 3). If the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a is "High", the proximity sensor 65a detects the metal plate 14a! /, !!, and the state is "Low", the metal plate 14a is positioned. When A → Position B → Position C, the state of the index detection circuit 65 is “High”, and when the metal plate 14a is in position C → Position D → Position A, the state of the index detection circuit 65 is “Low”. It is. The sub CPU 61 uses the rising edge from “Low” to “High” as the index (origin) 1 and the falling edge from “High” to “Low” as the index (origin) 2. recognize.
[0155] メイン CPU40は、ステップ S40においてサブ CPU61に対してスタート信号を送信し た後、リール回転時の演出を実行する (ステップ S41)。この処理は、抽選処理（図 10 、ステップ S13)の結果等に応じて定められる期間（例えば 3秒）にわたつて、下側画 像表示パネル 16への画像の表示や、スピーカ 29からの音の出力等を行う処理であ る。 [0155] After transmitting the start signal to the sub CPU 61 in step S40, the main CPU 40 executes the effect at the time of reel rotation (step S41). This process is a lottery process (Figure 10). In this process, the image is displayed on the lower image display panel 16 and the sound is output from the speaker 29 over a period (for example, 3 seconds) determined according to the result of step S13). .
[0156] 次に、メイン CPU40は、リール 14の回転の停止を指示するタイミングであるか否かを 判断する (ステップ S42)。  Next, the main CPU 40 determines whether or not it is time to instruct to stop the rotation of the reel 14 (step S42).
ここで、リール 14の回転の停止を指示するタイミングは、リール回転時の演出を終了 する時点から、リール 14の回転を停止させるために最低限必要な時間だけ前のタイ ミングである。なお、リール 14の回転を停止させるために最低限必要な時間は、予め 定められている。  Here, the timing for instructing the stop of the rotation of the reel 14 is the timing before the minimum necessary time for stopping the rotation of the reel 14 from the time when the effect at the time of the reel rotation ends. The minimum time required to stop the rotation of the reel 14 is determined in advance.
[0157] ステップ S42において、リール 14の回転の停止を指示するタイミングではないと判断 した場合、ステップ S42に処理を戻し、引き続きリール回転時の演出を行う。一方、ス テツプ S42において、リール 14の回転の停止を指示するタイミングであると判断した 場合、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶されたリールのコード No.をサブ CPU61に 送信する（ステップ S43)。サブ CPU61は、メイン CPU41からリールのコード No.を 受信すると、サブ CPU61が備える ROM (図示せず）に記憶されたステップ数とコー ド No.との対応表に基づいて、コード No.を、インデックスからのリールの停止位置（ ステップ数）に換算する (ステップ S52)。  [0157] If it is determined in step S42 that it is not the timing to instruct to stop the rotation of the reel 14, the process returns to step S42, and the effect at the time of reel rotation is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42 that it is the timing to instruct to stop the rotation of the reel 14, the main CPU 41 transmits the code number of the reel stored in the RAM 43 to the sub CPU 61 (step S43). When the sub CPU 61 receives the reel code number from the main CPU 41, the sub CPU 61 sets the code number based on the correspondence table between the number of steps stored in the ROM (not shown) of the sub CPU 61 and the code number. Converted to the reel stop position (number of steps) from the index (step S52).
[0158] 図 15は、ステップ数とコード No.との対応表を示した模式図である。各コード No. に は、インデックスと、ステップ数とが対応付けられている。  FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and code numbers. Each code number is associated with an index and the number of steps.
なお、各コード No.は、リール 14の外周面に描かれたシンボルに対応していて（図 3 参照）、コード No. "00"〜"10"のシンボルは、インデックス 1に対応している。また、 コード No. "11"〜"21"のシンボルは、インデックス 2に対応している。また、図 15に 示す対応表におけるステップ数は、インデックス 1を基準としたステップ数である。例 えば、コード No.が" 08"であれば、インデックス 1から 145ステップが、リールの停止 位置である。また、コード No.が" 12"であれば、インデックス 1から 218ステップ力 リ ールの停止位置である。  Each code number corresponds to the symbol drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the reel 14 (see FIG. 3), and the symbols with code numbers “00” to “10” correspond to index 1. . Symbols with code numbers “11” to “21” correspond to index 2. In addition, the number of steps in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 15 is the number of steps based on index 1. For example, if the code number is “08”, steps 1 through 145 are the reel stop positions. If the code number is “12”, it is the stop position of the index force 1 to 218 step force rail.
[0159] 次に、サブ CPU61は、リール停止処理を実行する（ステップ S53)。この処理におい て、サブ CPU61は、インデックス検出回路 65における" Low"から" High"への立ち 上がり（インデックス 1)の検出を各リール 14に対して行い、インデックス 1を検出したタ イミングで、ステップ S52においてコード No.カゝら換算されたステップ数に相当するパ ルスをモータ駆動回路 65に供給し、その後、パルスの供給を停止する。 [0159] Next, the sub CPU 61 executes a reel stop process (step S53). In this process, the sub CPU 61 makes a transition from “Low” to “High” in the index detection circuit 65. The rise (index 1) is detected for each reel 14, and at the timing when index 1 is detected, a pulse corresponding to the number of steps converted from the code number in step S52 is sent to the motor drive circuit 65. Then, supply of pulses is stopped.
[0160] 例えば、ステップ S52において、リールの停止位置力 インデックス 1から 145ステツ プであると決定された場合、サブ CPU61は、インデックス 1を検出したタイミングで、 1 45個のパルスをモータ駆動回路 65に供給し、その後、パルスの供給を停止する。ま た、ステップ S52において、リールの停止位置力 インデックス 1からの 218ステップで あると決定された場合、サブ CPU61は、インデックス 1を検出したタイミングで、 218 個のパルスをモータ駆動回路 65に供給する。その結果、リール 14力 図 11のステツ プ S32において決定されたコード No.のとおりに停止し、入賞ライン L上には、図 11 のステップ S32において決定された役に対応するシンボルの組合せが停止表示され る。一方、メイン CPU41は、リール回転時の演出を終了する。ステップ S44及び S53 の処理を終了した後、本処理を終了する。  [0160] For example, if it is determined in step S52 that the stop position force of the reel is between index 1 and 145 steps, the sub CPU 61 sends 1 45 pulses to the motor drive circuit 65 at the timing when index 1 is detected. And then the pulse supply is stopped. If it is determined in step S52 that the stop position force of the reel is 218 steps from index 1, the sub CPU 61 supplies 218 pulses to the motor drive circuit 65 at the timing when index 1 is detected. . As a result, the reel 14 force stops according to the code number determined in step S32 in FIG. 11, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S32 in FIG. Is displayed. On the other hand, the main CPU 41 ends the effect at the time of reel rotation. After finishing the processes of steps S44 and S53, this process is finished.
[0161] なお、ステップ S43において送信されたコード No. に対応するインデックスと、リール 14の回転が停止したときにインデックス検出回路 65によって検出されるインデックス とが異なる場合、リール 14に脱調が生じているので、メイン CPU41は、エラーメッセ ージを下側画像表示パネル 16に表示する等の処理を行 、、遊技を中断する。  [0161] Note that if the index corresponding to the code number transmitted in step S43 is different from the index detected by the index detection circuit 65 when the reel 14 stops rotating, the reel 14 is out of step. Therefore, the main CPU 41 performs processing such as displaying an error message on the lower image display panel 16 and interrupts the game.
例えば、インデックス 2に対応するコード No. 12でリール 14Lを停止させる処理を行 つたにも拘わらず、リール 14Lの回転が停止したときにインデックス検出回路 65によ つてインデックス 1が検出された場合には、遊技を中断する。  For example, when index 1 is detected by the index detection circuit 65 when the reel 14L stops rotating even though the reel 14L is stopped with code No. 12 corresponding to index 2. Interrupt the game.
[0162] 図 16は、図 10に示したサブルーチンのステップ S16において呼び出されて実行され るボーナスゲーム処理のサブノレ一チンを示すフローチャートである。ボーナスゲーム 処理においては、先ず、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶された抽選プログラムに 含まれる乱数発生プログラムを実行して得られた乱数値に基づ ヽて、 10〜25ゲーム のいずれかの中力 決定する（ステップ S60)。メイン CPU41は、決定したボーナス ゲームのゲーム数をデータとして RAM43に記憶する。  [0162] FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a bonus game process subroutine that is called and executed in step S16 of the subroutine shown in FIG. In the bonus game process, first, the main CPU 41 selects one of the 10 to 25 games based on the random number value obtained by executing the random number generation program included in the lottery program stored in the RAM 43. Determine (step S60). The main CPU 41 stores the determined number of bonus games in the RAM 43 as data.
[0163] 続いて、メイン CPU41は、抽選処理 (ステップ S61)及びリール回転制御処理 (ステツ プ S63)を行う。ステップ S61の処理は、図 11を用いて説明した処理と略同様の処理 である。また、ステップ S63の処理は、図 13を用いて説明した処理と略同様の処理で ある。これらの処理については、既に説明済であるから、ここでの説明は省略する。 [0163] Subsequently, the main CPU 41 performs a lottery process (step S61) and a reel rotation control process (step S63). The process in step S61 is substantially the same as the process described using FIG. It is. Further, the process in step S63 is substantially the same process as described with reference to FIG. Since these processes have already been described, description thereof is omitted here.
[0164] 次に、メイン CPU41は、ボーナスゲームトリガーが成立したか否か、すなわち、表示 窓 15内に「APPLE」が停止表示された力否かを判断する（ステップ S64)。ボーナス ゲームトリガーが成立したと判断した場合には、ボーナスゲームの繰り返し回数 tが新 たに抽選により決定され (ステップ S65)、その決定された繰り返し回数 tは、現在のボ 一ナスゲームのゲーム数 Tに加算される（ステップ S66)。これにより、ボーナスゲーム 中にボーナスゲームに当選すると、ボーナスゲームの残り回数が増える。具体的に言 えば、例えば、 20回のボーナスゲームに初めて移行した場合に、そのボーナスゲー ムの 12回目で 17回のボーナスゲームに当選したときには、その後、 25回（20回 1 2回 + 17回）のボーナスゲームが行われる。  Next, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a bonus game trigger is established, that is, whether or not “APPLE” is stopped and displayed in the display window 15 (step S64). If it is determined that the bonus game trigger has been established, the bonus game repeat count t is newly determined by lottery (step S65), and the determined repeat count t is the number of games in the current bonus game. It is added to T (step S66). As a result, if the bonus game is won during the bonus game, the remaining number of bonus games is increased. To be specific, for example, if you first transition to 20 bonus games and you win 17 bonus games at the 12th bonus game, then 25 (20 1 12 + 17 Times) bonus game.
[0165] ボーナスゲームトリガーが成立しなかった場合、メイン CPU41は、役が成立したか否 かを判断する (ステップ S67)。役が成立したと判断した場合、メイン CPU41は、投入 数及び役に応じたコインの払い出しを行う（ステップ S68)。この処理は、ステップ S 18 の処理と同様であり、既に説明済であるから、ここでの説明は省略する。  [0165] When the bonus game trigger is not established, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a winning combination has been established (step S67). When determining that the winning combination has been established, the main CPU 41 pays out coins according to the number of inserted coins and the winning combination (step S68). Since this process is the same as the process of step S 18 and has already been described, the description thereof is omitted here.
[0166] ステップ S66若しくはステップ S68の処理を実行した場合、又は、ステップ S67にお V、て、 V、ずれの役も成立して 、な 、と判断した場合 (ハズレであると判断した場合）、 メイン CPU61は、 RAM43に記憶されたボーナスゲームのゲーム数 Tを読み出し、 読み出したゲーム数 Tの値を 1減算する。そして、減算後のゲーム数 Tを再び RAM4 3に格納する（ステップ S69)。  [0166] When the processing of step S66 or step S68 is executed, or when it is determined that V, V, and the shift role are also established in step S67 (when it is determined that it is lost) The main CPU 61 reads the game number T of the bonus game stored in the RAM 43, and subtracts 1 from the value of the read game number T. Then, the subtracted game number T is stored again in the RAM 43 (step S69).
[0167] 次に、メイン CPU41は、ボーナスゲームの回数 T力 ステップ S60で決定された回数 に到達したカゝ否かを判断する (ステップ S70)。具体的には、 RAM43に記憶された ゲーム数 Tが 0となった力否かにより判断し、ゲーム数 T力^でない場合、すなわちボ 一ナスゲームの実行回数力 ステップ S60で決定された回数に到達して 、な 、と判 断する場合、ステップ S61に処理を戻し、上述した処理を繰り返す。一方、ゲーム数 T力 Oである場合、すなわち、ステップ S60で決定された回数に到達したと判断した場 合には、制御装置 200へ遊技回数リセット信号を送信し (ステップ S71)、その後、本 サブルーチンを終了する。遊技回数リセット信号は、その遊技機 10の遊技機識別情 報を含むものであり、制御装置 200の CPU201は、遊技回数リセット信号を受信する と、該遊技回数リセット信号に含まれる遊技機識別情報に対応付けてハードディスク ドライブ 205に記憶された遊技回数を 0にリセットする。 [0167] Next, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not the bonus game number T power has reached the number determined in step S60 (step S70). Specifically, the number of games stored in the RAM 43 is determined based on whether or not the power T becomes 0. If the number of games is not T power ^, that is, the number of times the bonus game is executed is determined by step S60. If it is determined that it has reached, the process returns to step S61 and the above-described process is repeated. On the other hand, if the number of games is T power O, that is, if it is determined that the number of times determined in step S60 has been reached, a game number reset signal is transmitted to the control device 200 (step S71). Exit the subroutine. The game number reset signal is used to identify the gaming machine identification information of the gaming machine 10. When the CPU 201 of the control device 200 receives the game count reset signal, the CPU 201 of the control device 200 sets the game count stored in the hard disk drive 205 in association with the gaming machine identification information included in the game count reset signal to 0. Reset to.
[0168] 図 17は、図 10に示したサブルーチンのステップ S20において呼び出されて実行され る還元モード処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the reduction mode process that is called and executed in step S20 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
ステップ S76〜ステップ S84の処理は、図 12を用いて説明した処理と略同様の処理 である。これらの処理については、既に説明済であるから、ここでの説明は省略する。  The processing from step S76 to step S84 is substantially the same processing as described with reference to FIG. Since these processes have already been described, description thereof is omitted here.
[0169] ここで、ステップ S79において実行される抽選処理では、図 18に示す成立可能性で 各役が成立する。  [0169] Here, in the lottery process executed in step S79, each combination is established with the possibility of establishment shown in FIG.
図 18は、還元モードでの抽選処理における複数種類の役と各役の成立可能性及び 払出数との関係を説明するための図である。  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of winning combinations, the possibility of establishment of each winning combination, and the number of payouts in the lottery process in the return mode.
図 18に示すにょうに、ボーナスゲームトリガーの成立可能性は、図 12に示したボー ナスゲームトリガーの成立可能性よりも高くなつている。本実施形態では、ボーナスゲ ームトリガー以外の役の成立可能性は、図 12と同様である場合について説明するが 、例えば、ボーナスゲームトリガー以外の役の成立可能性も図 12に比べて相対的に 高くすることとしてもよい。  As shown in FIG. 18, the possibility of establishing the bonus game trigger is higher than the possibility of establishing the bonus game trigger shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the case where the winning combination other than the bonus game trigger is established is described in the same manner as in FIG. 12, but for example, the winning possibility other than the bonus game trigger is relatively higher than that in FIG. It is good to do.
[0170] ステップ S82若しくは S84の処理を実行した場合、又は、ステップ S83において、い ずれの役も成立していないと判断した場合 (ハズレであると判断した場合）、メイン CP U41は、ボーナスゲーム実行を行ったか否かを判断する (ステップ S85)。  [0170] When the process of step S82 or S84 is executed, or when it is determined in step S83 that no combination is established (when it is determined that the game is lost), the main CPU 41 It is determined whether or not execution has been performed (step S85).
[0171] ボーナスゲーム実行を行っていないと判断した場合、メイン CPU41は、処理をステツ プ S76に戻す。一方、ボーナスゲーム実行を行っていないと判断した場合、メイン CP U41は、還元モードフラグを" OFF"にセットする（ステップ S86)。ステップ S86の処 理において、メイン CPU41は、第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に抽選により特別の役に 当選したとき、第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる手段として機能する。その後、本サブ ルーチンを終了する。  [0171] If it is determined that the bonus game is not being executed, the main CPU 41 returns the process to step S76. On the other hand, when determining that the bonus game is not being executed, the main CPU 41 sets the return mode flag to “OFF” (step S86). In the process of step S86, the main CPU 41 functions as a means for ending the second special gaming state when a special combination is won by lottery while the second special gaming state is occurring. Then, this subroutine is terminated.
[0172] 図 19は、図 10に示したサブルーチンのステップ S23において呼び出されて実行され る計数処理を示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the counting process that is called and executed in step S23 of the subroutine shown in FIG.
この処理は、遊技機 10のメイン CPU41と、制御装置 200の CPU201との間で行わ れる処理である。なお、ここでは、設定値" 600"が、複数の遊技機 10の夫々に設定 されて 、ることとする（図 6参照)。 This process is performed between the main CPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 and the CPU 201 of the control device 200. Process. Here, it is assumed that the set value “600” is set for each of the plurality of gaming machines 10 (see FIG. 6).
[0173] まず、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶されたコインの投入数及び払出数を遊技機 識別番号とともに、通信インターフェイス 44により、通信回線 101を介して、制御装置 200に送信する (ステップ S90)。遊技機 10から制御装置 200に送信されるコインの 投入数及び払出数は、その回の遊技におけるものである。 First, the main CPU 41 transmits the number of coins inserted and paid out stored in the RAM 43 together with the gaming machine identification number to the control device 200 via the communication line 101 via the communication interface 44 (step S90). . The number of coins inserted and paid out transmitted from the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 is that in the game at that time.
ステップ S90における処理は、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）力 遊技が行われるご とに、通信回線 101を介して、 RAM43 (記憶装置）に記憶された遊技機 10の識別情 報を、制御装置 200に送信する処理である。ステップ S90の処理を実行するとき、メイ ン CPU41は、通信回線 101を介して遊技機 10の識別情報を制御装置 200に送信 する手段として機能する。  In step S90, each time a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) power game is performed, the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in the RAM 43 (storage unit) is transmitted to the control unit 200 via the communication line 101. It is processing to transmit to. When executing the process of step S90, the main CPU 41 functions as means for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 via the communication line 101.
[0174] 一方、制御装置 200の CPU201は、遊技機 10から、通信回線 101を介して、インタ 一フェイス回路 204により、コインの投入数及び払出数と遊技機識別番号とを受信す ると、ハードディスクドライブ 205にお ヽて各遊技機識別番号に対応付けて記憶され ている遊技回数、累積投入数及び累積払出数のうち（図 6参照)、受信した遊技機識 別番号に対応付けられた遊技回数、累積投入数及び累積払出数を更新する (ステツ プ S100)。 On the other hand, when the CPU 201 of the control device 200 receives the number of coins inserted and paid out and the gaming machine identification number from the gaming machine 10 via the communication line 101 by the interface circuit 204, Of the number of games, the cumulative number of inputs, and the cumulative number of payouts stored in association with each gaming machine identification number on the hard disk drive 205 (see FIG. 6), the number is associated with the received gaming machine identification number. The number of games, the cumulative input number, and the cumulative payout number are updated (step S100).
[0175] 次に、 CPU201は、更新後の遊技回数が、設定値に達した力否かを判断する (ステ ップ S 101)。更新後の遊技回数が、設定値に達していないと判断した場合、本サブ ルーチンを終了する。  Next, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the updated number of games has reached the set value (step S 101). If it is determined that the updated number of games has not reached the set value, this subroutine is terminated.
[0176] 一方、ステップ S101において、更新後の遊技回数が、設定値に達していると判断し た場合、 CPU201は、還元指令信号を、インターフェイス回路 204により、通信回線 101を介して、遊技回数が設定値に達した遊技機 10に送信する (ステップ S103)。 その後、 CPU201は、その遊技機 10の遊技機識別番号に対応付けてハードデイス クドライブ 205に記憶された遊技回数を 0にリセットする (ステップ S104)。その後、本 処理を終了する。  [0176] On the other hand, if it is determined in step S101 that the updated number of games has reached the set value, the CPU 201 sends a return command signal to the interface circuit 204 via the communication line 101. Is transmitted to the gaming machine 10 that has reached the set value (step S103). Thereafter, the CPU 201 resets the number of games stored in the hard disk drive 205 in association with the gaming machine identification number of the gaming machine 10 to 0 (step S104). Then, this process ends.
[0177] 遊技機 10のメイン CPU41は、ステップ S103において制御装置 200から送信される 還元指令信号を受信すると、還元モードフラグを" ON"にセットする (ステップ S91)。 ステップ S91における処理は、遊技機 10の識別情報に基づいて制御装置 200によ つて累積的に計数される遊技回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達 したときに制御装置 200から送信される指令信号を受信する処理である。ステップ S9 1において、メイン CPU41は、制御装置 200から送信される指令信号を受信する手 段として機能する。その後、本処理を終了する。 [0177] When the main CPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 receives the return command signal transmitted from the control device 200 in step S103, the return mode flag is set to "ON" (step S91). The process in step S91 is performed when the number of games cumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine 10 reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games. This is a process of receiving a command signal transmitted from. In step S91, the main CPU 41 functions as a means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200. Thereafter, this process is terminated.
[0178] 本実施形態では、遊技回数が設定値に達すると還元モードへ移行する場合につい て説明した（図 19参照)。ただし、本発明は、この例に限定されるものではない。例え ば、遊技回数が設定値に達したとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数が、 1回の遊技に対して受け入れることが可能な上限値であった場合に、第 2特別遊技 状態を発生させる（還元モードへ移行する）こととしてもよい。このようにした場合、遊 技者が上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を行うことを促すことができ、カジノ等の施設は収 益の増大を図ることができる力 である。 [0178] In the present embodiment, the case has been described where the game mode shifts to the return mode when the number of games reaches the set value (see FIG. 19). However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, when the number of games reaches a set value, if the number of game media input for that game is the upper limit that can be accepted for one game, the second special game state It is good also as generating (it transfers to reduction | restoration mode). In this case, the player can be encouraged to insert the game media up to the upper limit, and casinos and other facilities are capable of increasing profits.
また、遊技媒体の投入数が上限値であった場合に第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるこ ととする場合、遊技回数が設定値に達したときではなぐ遊技媒体の投入が上限値ま で行われた遊技の回数が設定値に達したとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の 投入数が上限値であった場合に第 2特別遊技状態を発生させることとしてもょ ヽ。こ のようにした場合、各遊技において少数の遊技媒体が投入され、合計として少数の 遊技媒体が消費されただけで、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させることを防止することが できる力 である。  Also, if the second special gaming state is to be generated when the number of game media inserted is the upper limit, the game media will be inserted up to the upper limit when the number of games reaches the set value. When the number of games played reaches the set value, the second special game state may be generated if the number of game media inserted for that game is the upper limit. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the second special gaming state only by using a small number of game media in each game and consuming a small number of game media in total.
[0179] 以上、本実施形態に係る遊技機 10は、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）と、 RAM43 ( 記憶装置)とを備え、複数の遊技機 10の夫々における遊技回数を遊技機 10ごとに 累積的に計数する制御装置 200と通信回線 101を介して接続される遊技機 10であ つて、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、 予め定められた複数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理（図 11参 照）と、決定された役が特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲー ム（第 1特別遊技状態）を発生させるためのプログラムを RAM43から読み出して実行 する処理（図 16参照）と、遊技が行われるごとに、通信回線 101を介して、 RAM43 に記憶された遊技機 10の識別情報を制御装置 200に送信する処理（図 19、ステツ プ S90)と、遊技機の識別情報に基づいて制御装置 200によって累積的に計数され る遊技回数が、上記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達したときに、制御装置 2 00から送信される指令信号を受信する処理 (図 19、ステップ S91)と、上記指令信号 に基づ!/、て、上記抽選プログラムを実行することにより上記特別の役「ボーナスゲー ムトリガー」に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された還元モードへの移行 (第 2特 別遊技状態の発生）を行うためのプログラムを RAM43から読み出して実行する処理 (図 17参照）と、上記還元モードの発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役「ボーナス ゲームトリガー」に当選したとき、還元モードを終了させる処理（図 17、ステップ S86) とを実行する遊技機である。 As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing device) and the RAM 43 (storage device), and accumulates the number of games in each of the plurality of gaming machines 10 for each gaming machine 10. The main CPU 41 executes a lottery program stored in the RAM 43 to perform a plurality of predetermined combinations of roles. Processing to determine one combination to be selected (see Fig. 11), and when the determined combination is a special combination "Bonus Game Trigger", a bonus game (first special game state) is generated Processing for reading the program for reading from the RAM 43 (see FIG. 16) and each time a game is played, the identification information of the gaming machine 10 stored in the RAM 43 is transmitted to the control device 200 via the communication line 101. Processing (Figure 19, Steps S90) and when the number of games cumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value to be compared with the above-mentioned number of games, it is transmitted from the control device 200. The process of receiving the command signal (FIG. 19, step S91) and the above lottery program based on the command signal! / A process (see FIG. 17) for reading the program for executing the transition to the relatively high return mode (occurrence of the second special gaming state) from the RAM 43 (see FIG. 17) and the above during the occurrence of the return mode This is a gaming machine that executes the process of ending the return mode (FIG. 17, step S86) when the special combination “bonus game trigger” is won by lottery.
[0180] また、遊技機 10は、複数の遊技機 10の夫々における遊技回数を遊技機 10ごとに累 積的に計数する制御装置 200と通信回線 101を介して接続される遊技機 10であつ て、抽選により役を決定する役決定手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、決定された役が 特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲーム (第 1特別遊技状態） を発生させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技が行われるごとに、通信回線 101 を介して遊技機 10の識別情報を制御装置 200に送信する手段 (例えばメイン CPU4 1)と、遊技機の識別情報に基づいて制御装置 200によって累積的に計数される遊 技回数が設定値に達したときに制御装置 200から送信される指令信号を受信する手 段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選により上記特別の 役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊 技状態を発生させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、還元モードの発生中に上記抽 選により上記特別の役に当選したとき、還元モードを終了させる手段 (例えばメイン C PU41)とを備えたことを特徴とする。  [0180] The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine 10 connected via a communication line 101 to a control device 200 that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of the plurality of gaming machines 10 for each gaming machine 10. And a means for determining a combination by lottery (for example, the main CPU 41), and a means for generating a bonus game (first special gaming state) when the determined combination is a special combination "bonus game trigger" (for example, Main CPU 41), means for transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine 10 to the control device 200 via the communication line 101 every time a game is played (for example, the main CPU 41), and the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine A means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the number of games cumulatively counted by 200 reaches a set value (for example, the main CPU 41), and the lottery based on the command signal. Above special role "Bo A means for generating a second special gaming state (for example, the main CPU 41) set with a relatively high probability of winning a `` game trigger '' and winning the special role by the lottery during the return mode. And a means for terminating the reduction mode (for example, main CPU 41).
[0181] 遊技機 10によれば、制御装置 200において計数される遊技回数が、上記遊技回数 との比較対象となる設定値に達したとき、「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選してボー ナスゲームが発生する確率が相対的に高く設定された還元モードを発生させ、ボー ナスゲームが発生するまで、還元モードを継続させる。  [0181] According to the gaming machine 10, when the number of games counted in the control device 200 reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the bonus game trigger is won and the bonus game is played. A return mode with a relatively high probability of occurrence is generated, and the return mode is continued until a bonus game is generated.
従って、長期間にわたってボーナスゲームが発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費した 場合等であっても、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行えば、還元モードが発 生し、その中で発生するボーナスゲームにおいて、遊技者は、遊技回数が設定値に 達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることができる。その結果、 多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不信感を募らせたり、 遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができる。 Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without generating a bonus game for a long period of time, if the game is played until the number of games reaches the set value, the return mode is started. In the bonus game that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for playing the game until the number of games reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling unpleasant if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0182] 本実施形態に係る遊技機 10は、通信回線 101を介して制御装置 200と接続され、 制御装置 200によって、遊技機 10における遊技回数の計数と、遊技回数が設定値 に達した力否かの判定とが行われる。ただし、遊技機 10は、必ずしも、ネットワークを 利用したものである必要はなぐスタンドアロンであってもよい。  [0182] The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is connected to the control device 200 via the communication line 101, and the control device 200 counts the number of games in the gaming machine 10 and the force at which the number of games reaches the set value. A determination of whether or not is made. However, the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to use a network and may be a stand-alone.
[0183] 本発明に係るスタンドアロンの遊技機 10としては、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）と、 RAM43 (記憶装置）とを備えた遊技機 10であって、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記 憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複数種類の役の中か ら選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、決定された役が特別の役「ボーナスゲーム トリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲーム (第 1特別遊技状態）を発生させるためのプログ ラムを RAM43から読み出して実行する処理と、遊技が行われるごとに遊技回数を累 積的に計数する処理と、遊技回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象として定められた 設定値に達しているか否かを判定する処理と、遊技回数が設定値に達していると判 定されたとき、還元モードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生)を実行するためのプ ログラムを RAM43から読み出して実行する処理と、上記還元モードの発生中に上 記抽選により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選したとき、上記還元モー ドを終了させる処理とを実行する遊技機を挙げることができる。  The stand-alone gaming machine 10 according to the present invention is a gaming machine 10 that includes a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) and a RAM 43 (storage device), and the main CPU 41 is stored in the RAM 43. By executing the lottery program, a process for determining one combination selected from a plurality of types of predetermined combinations, and when the determined combination is a special combination “bonus game trigger” A process for reading out and executing a program for generating a game (first special game state) from the RAM 43, a process for cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is performed, and the number of games are the number of games. Processing to determine whether or not the set value set as a comparison target is reached, and when it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, transition to return mode (in the second special gaming state) Execute The process to read out the program from the RAM 43 and execute it, and the process to end the above-mentioned return mode when the special combination `` Bonus Game Trigger '' is won by the above lottery during the above-mentioned return mode A gaming machine to play.
[0184] この遊技機 10は、抽選により役を決定する役決定手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、決 定された役が特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲームを発生 させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技が行われるごとに、遊技回数を累積的に 計数する手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技回数が設定値に達しているか否かを 判定する手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技回数が設定値に達していると判定され たとき、上記抽選により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選する確率が相 対的に高く設定された還元モードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生)を行う手段（ 例えばメイン CPU41)と、上記還元モードの発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役 「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選したとき、上記還元モードを終了させる手段 (例えば メイン CPU41)とを備えて!/ヽる。 [0184] This gaming machine 10 includes a role determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a role by lottery, and a means for generating a bonus game when the determined role is a special bonus "bonus game trigger" ( For example, main CPU 41), means for cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is played (for example, main CPU 41), means for determining whether or not the number of games has reached a set value (for example, main CPU 41), When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, the transition to the return mode in which the probability of winning the special role “Bonus Game Trigger” is set relatively high by the lottery (the second special (E.g., generation of gaming state) (for example, main CPU 41) When the “bonus game trigger” is won, a means (for example, the main CPU 41) for ending the return mode is provided!
[0185] また、本実施形態に係る遊技機 10は、遊技回数が設定値に達したとき、還元モード への移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生）が行われるものであるが、本発明は、この例に 限定されるものではない。本発明の遊技機 10は、コインの収支が設定値に達したとき 、還元モードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生）が行われるものであってもよい。  [0185] Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the number of games reaches the set value, transition to the return mode (generation of the second special gaming state) is performed. However, it is not limited to this example. The gaming machine 10 of the present invention may be one in which a transition to a return mode (generation of a second special gaming state) is performed when the balance of coins reaches a set value.
[0186] このような遊技機 10は、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）と、 RAM43 (記憶装置）とを 備え、複数の遊技機 10におけるコインの収支を遊技機 10ごとに累積的に計数する 制御装置 200と通信回線 101を介して接続される遊技機 10であって、メイン CPU41 は、 RAM43に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複数 種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、決定された役が特別の役「 ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲーム (第 1特別遊技状態)を発生させ るためのプログラムを RAM43から読み出して実行する処理と、遊技が行われるごと に、通信回線 101を介して、 RAM43に記憶された当該遊技におけるコインの投入 数及び払出数を、遊技機 10の識別情報とともに、制御装置 200に送信する処理と、 遊技機 10の識別情報と当該遊技におけるコインの投入数及び払出数とに基づいて 制御装置 200によって累積的に計数されるコインの収支が、上記遊技媒体の収支と の比較対象となる設定値以下になったときに、制御装置 200から送信される指令信 号を受信する処理と、上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選プログラムを実行すること により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定 された還元モードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生）を行うためのプログラムを RA M43から読み出して実行する処理と、上記還元モードの発生中に上記抽選により上 記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選したとき、上記還元モードを終了させる 処理とを実行する。  [0186] Such a gaming machine 10 includes a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing unit) and a RAM 43 (storage device), and controls to count the balance of coins in a plurality of gaming machines 10 cumulatively for each gaming machine 10. A gaming machine 10 connected to the device 200 via the communication line 101, and the main CPU 41 is selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the RAM 43. Processing to determine one combination and processing to read out and execute a program for generating a bonus game (first special gaming state) from RAM 43 when the determined combination is a special combination `` Bonus Game Trigger '' Each time a game is played, a process of transmitting the number of coins inserted and paid out in the game stored in the RAM 43 to the control device 200 through the communication line 101 together with the identification information of the gaming machine 10; Game The balance of coins cumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the identification information of the machine 10 and the number of coins inserted and paid out in the game is less than or equal to the set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. The probability of winning the special role “bonus game trigger” by receiving the command signal transmitted from the control device 200 and executing the lottery program based on the command signal is determined. A process for reading out and executing a program for switching to a relatively high return mode (occurrence of the second special gaming state) from the RAM 43 and the above lottery during the occurrence of the return mode. When the winning combination “bonus game trigger” is won, the process of ending the return mode is executed.
[0187] この遊技機 10は、抽選により役を決定する役決定手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、決 定された役が特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲーム (第 1特 別遊技状態)を発生させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技が行われるごとに、通 信回線 101を介して、その回の遊技におけるコインの収支を遊技機 10の識別情報と ともに、制御装置 200に送信する手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技機 10の識別 情報とその回におけるコインの収支とに基づいて制御装置 200によって累積的に計 数されるコインの収支が、設定値に達したときに制御装置 200から送信される指令信 号を受信する手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、上記指令信号に基づいて、上記抽選 により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定 された還元モードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生)を行う手段 (例えばメイン CP U41)と、上記還元モードの発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲーム トリガー」に当選したとき、上記還元モードを終了させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と を備えている。 [0187] This gaming machine 10 has a role determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a role by lottery, and a bonus game (first special game) when the determined role is a special role "bonus game trigger". A game state) (e.g., the main CPU 41), and every time a game is played, the balance of coins in the game at that time is connected to the identification information of the gaming machine 10 via the communication line 101. In both cases, the balance of coins cumulatively counted by the control device 200 based on the means for transmitting to the control device 200 (for example, the main CPU 41), the identification information of the gaming machine 10 and the balance of coins at that time is set. Means for receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device 200 when the value is reached (for example, the main CPU 41), and the probability of winning the special combination “bonus game trigger” by the lottery based on the command signal Is set to a relatively high return mode (occurrence of the second special gaming state) (for example, the main CPU 41), and the special combination `` bonus game '' by the lottery during the occurrence of the return mode. And a means (for example, main CPU 41) for ending the return mode when the “trigger” is won.
[0188] このような遊技機 10によれば、遊技媒体の収支が上記遊技媒体の収支との比較対 象となる設定値以下になったとき、ボーナスゲームが発生する確率が相対的に高く設 定された還元モードへ移行させ、ボーナスゲームが発生するまで、還元モードを継続 させる。  [0188] According to such a gaming machine 10, the probability that a bonus game will occur is set relatively high when the balance of the game media falls below a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. Shift to the specified return mode and continue the return mode until a bonus game occurs.
従って、長期間にわたってボーナスゲームが発生せずに多数の遊技媒体を消費した 場合等であっても、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になるまで遊技を行えば、還元モ ードへ移行がし、その中で発生するボーナスゲームにおいて、遊技者は、遊技媒体 の収支が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったことに対する還元を確実に受けることが できる。その結果、多数の遊技媒体を消費した遊技者が、遊技に対して不快感ゃ不 信感を募らせたり、遊技に対する興味や関心を失ったりすることを防止することができ る。  Therefore, even if a large number of game media are consumed without generating a bonus game over a long period of time, if the game is played until the balance of the game media falls below the set value, the game shifts to the return mode. In the bonus game that occurs, the player can surely receive a reward for playing the game until the balance of the game medium reaches the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has consumed a large number of game media from feeling uncomfortable if the game is unpleasant or losing interest in the game.
[0189] 上述した遊技機 10は、通信回線 101を介して制御装置 200と接続され、制御装置 2 00によって、遊技機 10におけるコインの収支の計数と、コインの収支が設定値に達 した力否かの判定とが行われる。ただし、遊技機 10は、必ずしも、ネットワークを利用 したものである必要はなぐスタンドアロンであってもよい。  [0189] The gaming machine 10 described above is connected to the control device 200 via the communication line 101, and the control device 200 counts the coin balance in the gaming machine 10 and the force at which the coin balance reaches the set value. A determination of whether or not is made. However, the gaming machine 10 may not necessarily be a stand-alone device that uses a network.
[0190] このような遊技機 10としては、メイン CPU41 (演算処理装置）と、 RAM43 (記憶装置 )とを備えた遊技機 10であって、メイン CPU41は、 RAM43に記憶された抽選プログ ラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの 役を決定する処理と、決定された役が特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき 、ボーナスゲーム (第 1特別遊技状態）を発生させるためのプログラムを RAM43から 読み出して実行する処理と、遊技が行われるごとに遊技媒体の収支を累積的に計数 する処理と、遊技媒体の収支との比較対象となる設定値を、予め段階的に定められ た複数の候補値の中から選択する処理と、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になった か否かを判定する処理と、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になったと判定したとき、上 記抽選プログラムを実行することにより上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当 選する確率が相対的に高く設定された還元モードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発 生）を行うためのプログラムを RAM43から読み出して実行する処理と、上記還元モ ードの発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選したと き、上記還元モードを終了させる処理とを実行することを特徴とする遊技機 10を挙げ ることがでさる。 Such a gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine 10 having a main CPU 41 (arithmetic processing device) and a RAM 43 (storage device), and the main CPU 41 uses a lottery program stored in the RAM 43. By executing, a process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of types of predetermined combinations, and when the determined combination is a special combination “bonus game trigger” A process for reading out and executing a program for generating a bonus game (first special gaming state) from the RAM 43, a process for cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played, and a balance of game media A process for selecting a set value to be compared from among a plurality of candidate values determined in stages, a process for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium is equal to or less than the set value, and a game medium Transition to return mode with a relatively high probability of winning the special role `` Bonus Game Trigger '' by executing the above lottery program. The program for executing the second special gaming state) is read from the RAM 43 and executed, and the special combination “bonus game trigger” is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the reduction mode. A gaming machine 10 that, when selected, executes a process for ending the return mode.
[0191] この遊技機 10は、抽選により役を決定する役決定手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、決 定された役が特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」であるとき、ボーナスゲーム (第 1特 別遊技状態)を発生させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、遊技が行われるごとに、遊 技媒体の収支を累積的に計数する手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、設定値を予め段 階的に定められた複数の候補値の中から選択する手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、 遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になった力否かを判定する手段 (例えばメイン CPU4 1)と、遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になったと判定したとき、上記抽選により上記特 別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された還元モ ードへの移行 (第 2特別遊技状態の発生)を行う手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)と、上記 還元モードの発生中に上記抽選により上記特別の役「ボーナスゲームトリガー」に当 選したとき、上記還元モードを終了させる手段 (例えばメイン CPU41)とを備えている  [0191] This gaming machine 10 has a role determining means (for example, the main CPU 41) for determining a role by a lottery and a bonus game (first special game) when the determined role is a special role "bonus game trigger". Means for generating (game state) (for example, the main CPU 41), means for cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played (for example, the main CPU 41), and setting values are determined in stages. A means for selecting from a plurality of candidate values (for example, the main CPU 41), a means for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium is below a set value (for example, the main CPU 41), and a balance for the game medium are set. When it is determined that the value is less than or equal to the value, transition to the return mode in which the probability of winning the special role `` Bonus Game Trigger '' is set relatively high by the above lottery (occurrence of the second special gaming state) Means (for example, main CPU41) and the above Means for terminating the return mode (for example, the main CPU 41) when the special combination “bonus game trigger” is won by the lottery during the return mode.
[0192] 本実施形態では、すべての遊技機 10の設定値が" 600"に設定されている場合につ いて説明した。しかし、本発明において、設定値は、遊技機 10ごとに異なっていても よぐ例えば、予め段階的に定められた複数の候補値の中から選択されることとしても よい。 In this embodiment, the case has been described where the setting value of all the gaming machines 10 is set to “600”. However, in the present invention, the set value may be different for each gaming machine 10. For example, the set value may be selected from a plurality of candidate values that are determined in stages.
[0193] 本実施形態では、第 2特別遊技状態が、第 1特別遊技状態が発生するまで継続する 場合について説明したが、本発明において、第 2特別遊技状態は、所定の条件が満 たされるまで継続するのであればこの例に限られない。このようにする場合、還元モ ードが終了する契機となる所定の条件としては、例えば、所定期間が経過すること、 所定の役に所定回数成立すること等が挙げられる。 In this embodiment, the second special gaming state continues until the first special gaming state occurs. Although the case has been described, in the present invention, the second special gaming state is not limited to this example as long as it continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the predetermined condition that triggers the end of the reduction mode includes, for example, the elapse of a predetermined period and the establishment of a predetermined number of times for a predetermined role.
また、第 2特別遊技状態は、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態であれば、特に限定さ れるものではない。また、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態としては、通常の遊技状態 (第 1特別遊技状態又は第 2特別遊技状態以外の遊技状態)より有利であれば、特 に限定されるものではなぐ例えば、通常の遊技状態より多くの遊技媒体を獲得し得 る状態、通常の遊技状態より高い確率で遊技媒体を獲得し得る状態、通常の遊技状 態より遊技媒体の消費数が少なくなる状態等を挙げることができる。具体的に、第 2 特別遊技状態としては、フリーゲーム、セカンドゲーム、ミステリーボーナス等を挙げ ることがでさる。  Further, the second special game state is not particularly limited as long as it is a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, the gaming state advantageous to the player is not particularly limited as long as it is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (a gaming state other than the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state). State that can acquire more game media than the normal game state, state that can acquire game media with higher probability than normal game state, state that consumes less game media than normal game state, etc. Can do. Specifically, the second special gaming state may include a free game, a second game, a mystery bonus, and the like.
[0194] また、本実施形態では、還元モードが" ON"にセットされると、その後、何らかの条件 の成立を契機とすることなぐ還元モードに移行する場合について説明した。ただし、 本発明は、この例に限定されず、例えば、還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされた後 、所定の条件が満たされたときに、還元モードへ移行することとしてもよい。このように する場合、還元モードへ移行する契機となる所定の条件としては、特に限定されるも のではなぐ例えば、ボーナストリガーが成立したこと、シンボルが所定の組合せで停 止表示されたこと等を挙げることができる。  [0194] Also, in the present embodiment, when the return mode is set to "ON", a case has been described in which a transition is made to a return mode that is not triggered by the establishment of some condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, after the reduction mode flag is set to “ON”, the mode may be shifted to the reduction mode when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In such a case, the predetermined conditions that trigger the transition to the return mode are not particularly limited. For example, a bonus trigger is established, symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, etc. Can be mentioned.
[0195] また、本実施形態では、還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされると、その後、停止表 示されるシンボルの組合せに拘わらず、還元モードに移行する場合について説明し た。ただし、本発明は、この例に限定されるものではない。例えば、還元モードへの 移行を示すシンボルの組合せを予め設定しておき、当該組合せでシンボルを停止表 示させた後に、還元モードに移行することとしてもよい。  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which, when the return mode flag is set to “ON”, the mode is subsequently shifted to the return mode regardless of the combination of symbols displayed to be stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a combination of symbols indicating the transition to the return mode may be set in advance, and the symbols may be stopped and displayed in the combination, and then the mode may be shifted to the return mode.
[0196] 本実施形態では、シンボルが停止表示され（図 10、ステップ S 14)、停止表示された シンボルの組合せに基づく処理（図 10、ステップ S15〜S20)が行われた後、遊技回 数の計数（図 10、ステップ S22)が行われる場合について説明した。しかし、本発明 において、遊技回数の計数が行われるタイミングは、特に限定されるものではない。 例えば、コインの BETが行われたタイミング（図 10、ステップ S 10又は S 11の後）であ つてもよく、スピンボタンが ONされたタイミング（図 10、ステップ S 12の後）であっても よい。また、シンボルの変動表示が開始されてから、シンボルが停止表示され、停止 表示されたシンボルの組合せに基づく処理が行われるまでの所定のタイミング (例え ば、シンボルが停止表示されたタイミング)で、遊技回数の計数が行われることとして もよい。なお、遊技媒体の収支を計数するタイミングについても、上述したものを採用 することが可能である。 [0196] In this embodiment, symbols are stopped and displayed (Fig. 10, step S14), and after the processing based on the combination of stopped symbols (Fig. 10, steps S15 to S20), the number of games is played. A case has been described in which counting (FIG. 10, step S22) is performed. However, in the present invention, the timing at which the number of games is counted is not particularly limited. For example, it may be the timing when a coin BET is made (Fig. 10, after step S10 or S11), or even when the spin button is turned on (Fig. 10, after step S12). Good. In addition, at the predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed) from when the variable display of the symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and processed based on the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed. The number of games may be counted. It is possible to use the above-mentioned timing for counting the balance of game media.
[0197] 本実施形態では、還元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされてから（図 10、ステップ S22 )、還元モードへの移行（図 10、ステップ S20)が行われるまでの間に、特別の役「ボ 一ナスゲームトリガー」が成立した場合（図 10、ステップ S 15)、ボーナスゲームを発 生させた後（図 10、ステップ S16)、さらに還元モードへの移行を行う遊技機 10につ いて説明した。すなわち、本実施形態に係る遊技機は、遊技回数が設定値に達して から、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるまでの間に、特別の役が成立した場合には、上 記特別の役に基づく第 1特別遊技状態を発生させ、さらに第 2特別遊技状態を発生 さ ·¾：るちのである。  [0197] In the present embodiment, after the reduction mode flag is set to "ON" (Fig. 10, step S22), the transition to the reduction mode (Fig. 10, step S20) is performed before the special mode flag is set to "ON". When the role “Bonus Game Trigger” is established (FIG. 10, step S15), after the bonus game is generated (FIG. 10, step S16), the game machine 10 that makes the transition to the return mode is further connected. Explained. In other words, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, if a special combination is established between the time when the number of games reaches the set value and the occurrence of the second special gaming state, The first special gaming state based on the first special gaming state is generated, and the second special gaming state is further generated.
[0198] ただし、本発明は、この例に限定されるものではない。例えば、遊技回数が設定値に 達してから、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるまでの間に、特別の役が成立した場合に は、第 1特別遊技状態のみを発生させることとしてもよい。上記形態を採用した場合、 遊技者は、遊技回数が設定値に達するまで遊技を行ったとき、必ず、第 1特別遊技 状態又は第 2特別遊技状態によって利益を得ることができる。上記形態も、本発明の 形態の一つである。  [0198] However, the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, if a special combination is established between the time when the number of games reaches a set value and the time when the second special game state is generated, only the first special game state may be generated. When the above form is adopted, the player can always benefit from the first special game state or the second special game state when playing until the number of games reaches the set value. The above form is also one form of the present invention.
上記形態を遊技機 10に採用する場合、図 10に示した処理にかえて、例えば、以下 の処理を行うこととすればょ 、。  When the above form is adopted for the gaming machine 10, for example, the following processing is performed instead of the processing shown in FIG.
[0199] 図 20は、遊技実行処理のサブルーチンの他の一例を示すフローチャートである。図FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another example of a subroutine for game execution processing. Figure
20に示したフローチャートにおいて、図 10に示したフローチャートのステップと同様 の処理をするステップには同一の符号を付した。 In the flowchart shown in FIG. 20, steps that perform the same processing as the steps in the flowchart shown in FIG.
[0200] ステップ S10〜ステップ S14の処理を実行した後、メイン CPU41は、ボーナスゲーム トリガーが成立したか否かを判断し (ステップ S 15)、ボーナスゲームトリガーが成立し たと判断した場合には、ボーナスゲーム処理を実行する (ステップ S 16)。その後、還 元モードフラグが" ON"にセットされているか否かを判断し (ステップ S25)、還元モー ドフラグが" ON"にセットされている場合には、還元モードフラグを" OFF"にセットす る（ステップ S26)。そして、ステップ S21の処理を行い、本サブルーチンを終了する。 他の処理については、図 10を用いて説明した処理と同様の処理であるから、ここで の説明は省略する。なお、図 20に示すサブルーチンにおいても、図 10に示したサブ ルーチンと同様に、コインが BETされた後（ステップ S10)、スピンボタン 23が ONさ れた力否かの判断 (ステップ S 12)を行い、スピンボタン 23が ONされたと判断した場 合 (ステップ S12： YES)、クレジット数を減算する処理 (ステップ SI 1)を行うこととして ちょい。 [0200] After executing the processing of step S10 to step S14, the main CPU 41 determines whether or not a bonus game trigger is established (step S15), and the bonus game trigger is established. If it is determined that the bonus game has been made, bonus game processing is executed (step S16). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the reduction mode flag is set to “ON” (step S25). If the reduction mode flag is set to “ON”, the reduction mode flag is set to “OFF”. (Step S26). Then, the process of step S21 is performed, and this subroutine is terminated. The other processes are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 10, and a description thereof is omitted here. In the subroutine shown in FIG. 20, as in the subroutine shown in FIG. 10, after the coin is bet (step S10), it is determined whether or not the spin button 23 is turned on (step S12). If it is determined that the spin button 23 has been turned on (step S12: YES), the process of subtracting the number of credits (step SI 1) should be performed.
[0201] ここで、設定値が 600であるとして、図 20に示した処理について具体的に説明する。  Here, assuming that the set value is 600, the processing shown in FIG. 20 will be specifically described.
ステップ S22において、遊技回数が 600回に達し、還元モードフラグが成立した場合 、 601回目の遊技でボーナスゲームトリガーが成立すると (ステップ S15)、ボーナス ゲームが発生するが（ステップ S16)、還元モードへの移行は行われない（ステップ S 25、 S26)。一方、 601回目の遊技でボーナスゲームトリガーが成立しなかった場合 には、還元モードへの移行が行われる（ステップ S 19、 S20)。  In step S22, when the number of games reaches 600 times and the return mode flag is established, a bonus game is generated in the 601st game (step S15), but a bonus game is generated (step S16). Is not transferred (steps S 25 and S 26). On the other hand, when the bonus game trigger is not established in the 601st game, a transition to the return mode is performed (steps S19 and S20).
従って、図 20に示した処理が行われる場合、遊技回数が設定値に達すると、必ず、 ボーナスゲームが発生するか又は還元モードへの移行が行われるのである。  Therefore, when the processing shown in FIG. 20 is performed, whenever the number of games reaches the set value, a bonus game is generated or a transition to the return mode is performed.
[0202] また、本発明にお 、ては、遊技回数が設定値に達してから、第 2特別遊技状態を発 生させるまでの間に、特別の役が成立した場合には、第 2特別遊技状態のみを発生 させることとしてもよぐ第 1特別遊技状態及び第 2特別遊技状態のいずれか 1を遊技 状況等に応じて選択し、発生させることとしてもよい。  [0202] Further, in the present invention, if a special combination is established between the time when the number of games reaches the set value and the time when the second special game state is generated, Only one of the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, which may be generated only in the gaming state, may be selected and generated according to the gaming situation or the like.
[0203] なお、遊技媒体の収支に応じて第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる場合についても、上 述した形態と同様の形態を採用することができる。すなわち、遊技媒体の収支が設定 値以下となつてから、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるまでの間に、特別の役が成立し た場合には、第 1特別遊技状態のみを発生させることとしてもよぐ第 2特別遊技状態 のみを発生させることとしてもよぐ第 1特別遊技状態及び第 2特別遊技状態のいず れか 1を遊技状況等に応じて選択し、発生させることとしてもよ 、のである。 [0204] 以上、本発明の実施形態を説明したが、具体例を例示したに過ぎず、特に本発明を 限定するものではなぐ各手段等の具体的構成は、適宜設計変更可能である。また、 本発明の実施形態に記載された効果は、本発明から生じる最も好適な効果を列挙し たに過ぎず、本発明による効果は、本発明の実施形態に記載されたものに限定され るものではない。 [0203] It should be noted that, in the case where the second special game state is generated according to the balance of the game media, the same form as described above can be adopted. In other words, if a special role is established between the time when the balance of the game medium falls below the set value and the time when the second special game state is generated, only the first special game state is generated. It may be possible to generate only the second special gaming state or the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state 1 depending on the gaming situation etc. That's it. [0204] The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but only specific examples are illustrated, and the specific configuration of each means and the like that are not particularly limited to the present invention can be appropriately changed in design. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not a thing.
図面の簡単な説明  Brief Description of Drawings
[0205] [図 1]本発明の一実施形態に係る遊技システムの全体構成を示す概略図である。  FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 2]本発明の一実施形態に係る遊技機を模式的に示す斜視図である。  FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.
[図 3]各リールの外周面に描かれたシンボルの列を示した模式図である。  FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a row of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel.
[図 4]図 2に示した遊技機の内部構成を示すブロック図である。  4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.
[図 5]本発明の一実施形態に係る制御装置の内部構成を示すブロック図である。  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[図 6]遊技機識別番号と遊技履歴との対応表の一例を模式的に示す図である。  FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a correspondence table between gaming machine identification numbers and gaming history.
[図 7]図 4に示したマザ一ボードとゲーミングボードとによるゲームプログラム及びゲー ムシステムプログラムの認証読取処理の手順を示したチャートである。  FIG. 7 is a chart showing a procedure of authentication reading processing of the game program and game system program by the mother board and gaming board shown in FIG. 4.
[図 8]遊技モード選択処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of game mode selection processing.
[図 9] (a)〜 (b)は、遊技モード選択処理が実行されるときに下側画像表示パネルに 表示される画像の一例を示す図である。  [FIG. 9] (a) to (b) are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the lower image display panel when the game mode selection process is executed.
[図 10]遊技実行処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of game execution processing.
[図 11]抽選処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a lottery processing subroutine.
[図 12]本実施形態における複数種類の役と各役の成立可能性及び払出数との関係 を説明するための図である。  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of combinations, the possibility of establishment of each combination, and the number of payouts in the present embodiment.
[図 13]リール回転制御処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a subroutine for reel rotation control processing.
[図 14] (a)〜（d)は、リールの回転動作について説明するための側面図である。  [FIG. 14] (a) to (d) are side views for explaining the reel rotation operation.
[図 15]ステップ数とコード No.との対応表を示した模式図である。  FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence table between the number of steps and a code number.
[図 16]ボーナスゲーム処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of bonus game processing.
[図 17]還元モード処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of reduction mode processing.
[図 18]還元モードでの抽選処理における複数種類の役と各役の成立可能性及び払 出数との関係を説明するための図である。 [図 19]計数処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between a plurality of types of winning combinations, the possibility of establishment of each winning combination, and the number of payouts in the lottery process in the return mode. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a counting process subroutine.
[図 20]遊技実行処理のサブルーチンの他の一例を示すフロー 符号の説明 FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another example of the game execution processing subroutine.
10 遊技機 (スロットマシン） 10 Pachislot machines (slot machines)
11 キャビネット 11 Cabinet
12 トップボックス 12 Top box
13 メインドア 13 Main door
14 (14L、 14C、 14R) リール  14 (14L, 14C, 14R) reel
15 (15L、 15C、 15R) 表示窓 15 (15L, 15C, 15R) Display window
16 下側画像表示パネル  16 Lower image display panel
18 コイントレイ  18 coin tray
19 コイン払出口  19 Coin payment exit
20 コントローノレノ ネノレ  20 Contoroleno Nenore
21 コイン受入口  21 Coin acceptance
22 紙幣識別器  22 bill validator
23 スピンボタン  23 Spin button
24 チェンジボタン  24 Change button
25 キャッシュアウトボタン  25 Cash out button
26 1 BETボタン  26 1 BET button
27 最大 BETボタン  27 Maximum BET button
29 スピーカ  29 Speaker
30 ランプ  30 lamp
31 クレジット数表示部  31 Credit number display
32 ペイアウト数表示部  32 Payout number display
33 上側画像表示パネル  33 Upper image display panel
34 ベリーガラス  34 Berry glass
35 チケットプリンタ  35 Ticket printer
36 カード受入口 データ表示器 36 Card entry Data display
キーパッド  key pad
バーコード付チケット  Ticket with barcode
マザ一ボード  Mother board
メイン CPU  Main CPU
ROM RAM  ROM RAM
通信インターフェイス  Communication interface
電源ユニット  Power supply unit
ゲーミングボード  Gaming board
CPU  CPU
ブート ROM  Boot ROM
メモリカード  Memory card
GAL  GAL
本体 PCB  Main body PCB
サブ CPU  Sub CPU
モータ駆動回路  Motor drive circuit
FPGA  FPGA
ドライバ  The driver
インデックス検出回路  Index detection circuit
ホッノヽ ~~  Hono Pass ~~
コイン検出部  Coin detector
グラフィックボード  Graphic board
タツチパネル Touch panel
(70L、 70C、 70R) ステッピングモータ 位置変更検出回路 (70L, 70C, 70R) Stepping motor position change detection circuit
ドア PCB  Door pcb
冷陰極管 100 遊技システム 200 制御装置 Cold cathode tube 100 gaming system 200 controller

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  [1] A role determining means for determining a role by lottery,
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象 となる設定値に達したとき、前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的 に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と  When the number of games cumulatively counted every time a game is played reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the probability of winning the special combination is set relatively high by the lottery. Means for generating a second special gaming state;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[2] 複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技回数を遊技機ごとに累積的に計数する制御装置 と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機であって、 [2] A gaming machine connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  A role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、前記通信回線を介して遊技機の識別情報を前記制御装置 に送信する手段と、  Means for transmitting identification information of a gaming machine to the control device via the communication line each time a game is performed;
前記遊技機の識別情報に基づいて前記制御装置によって累積的に計数される遊技 回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達したときに前記制御装置から 送信される指令信号を受信する手段と、  A command signal transmitted from the control device is received when the number of games cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games. Means to
前記指令信号に基づいて、前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的 に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と  Based on the command signal, means for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special combination by the lottery is set relatively high;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[3] 抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、 [3] A role determination means for determining a role by lottery,
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special state, which is a game state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技回数を累積的に計数する手段と、  Means for cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is played;
前記遊技回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象として定められた設定値に達している か否かを判定する手段と、  Means for determining whether or not the number of games has reached a set value determined as a comparison target with the number of games;
前記遊技回数が前記設定値に達していると判定されたとき、前記抽選により前記特 別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手 段と When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, the special lottery is performed by the lottery. A means for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning another role is set relatively high;
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[4] 前記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選したとき、前 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる手段 [4] Means for terminating the second special gaming state when the special combination is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the second special gaming state
を備えたことを特徴とする請求項 1〜3のいずれか 1に記載の遊技機。  The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
[5] 1回の遊技に対して所定の上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を受け入れることが可能な受 入手段を備え、 [5] It has a receiving means capable of accepting input of game media up to a predetermined upper limit for one game,
前記第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段は、前記遊技回数が前記設定値に達したと き、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数が前記上限値であった場合に、第 2特 別遊技状態を発生させることを特徴とする請求項 1〜3のいずれか 1に記載の遊技機  The means for generating the second special game state is such that when the number of games reaches the set value and the number of game media input for that game is the upper limit value, the second special game state is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a state is generated.
[6] 演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、 [6] A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
前記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、  A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象 となる設定値に達したとき、前記抽選プログラムを実行することにより前記特別の役に 当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプロ グラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と  When the number of games cumulatively counted every time a game is played reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games, the probability of winning the special role by executing the lottery program is relatively And a process for reading out and executing a program for generating a second special gaming state set to be high from the storage device.
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  A game machine characterized by executing
[7] 演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備え、複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技回数を遊技 機ごとに累積的に計数する制御装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機であって 前記演算処理装置は、 前記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、 [7] A gaming machine that includes an arithmetic processing device and a storage device, and is connected to a control device that cumulatively counts the number of games in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine via a communication line, the arithmetic processing The device A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、 When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、前記通信回線を介して、前記記憶装置に記憶された遊技機 の識別情報を前記制御装置に送信する処理と、 A process of transmitting the identification information of the gaming machine stored in the storage device to the control device via the communication line each time a game is performed;
前記遊技機の識別情報に基づいて前記制御装置によって累積的に計数される遊技 回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象となる設定値に達したときに、前記制御装置か ら送信される指令信号を受信する処理と、 A command signal transmitted from the control device when the number of games cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine reaches a set value to be compared with the number of games. Processing to receive
前記指令信号に基づいて、前記抽選プログラムを実行することにより前記特別の役 に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプ ログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と Based on the command signal, a program for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is read from the storage device. Process to be executed
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。 A game machine characterized by executing
演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、 A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
前記演算処理装置は、 The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、 A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、 When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技回数を累積的に計数する処理と、 A process of cumulatively counting the number of games each time a game is played,
遊技回数が、前記遊技回数との比較対象として定められた設定値に達している力否 かを判定する処理と、 A process for determining whether or not the number of games has reached a set value determined as a comparison target with the number of games;
遊技回数が設定値に達していると判定されたとき、前記抽選プログラムを実行するこ とにより前記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態 を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。 [9] 前記演算処理装置は、 When it is determined that the number of games has reached the set value, the second special game state in which the probability of winning the special combination is set to be relatively high by executing the lottery program is generated. A game machine that executes a process of reading a program from the storage device and executing the program. [9] The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選したとき、前 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる処理  Processing for terminating the second special gaming state when the special combination is won by the lottery while the second special gaming state is occurring
を実行することを特徴とする請求項 6〜8の ヽずれか 1に記載の遊技機。  9. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the game machine according to claim 6 is executed.
[10] 前記演算処理装置は、 [10] The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記遊技回数が前記設定値に達したとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入 数が、予め定められた 1回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数の上限値であった場 合に、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを実行することを特徴とする 請求項 6〜8の 、ずれか 1に記載の遊技機。  When the number of games reaches the set value, if the number of game media input for that game is the predetermined upper limit value of the number of game media input for one game, the second 9. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein a program for generating a special gaming state is executed.
[11] 抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、 [11] A role determining means for determining a role by lottery,
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、前記遊技媒体の収 支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったとき、前記抽選により前記特別の役に当 選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  Probability of winning the special role by the lottery when the balance of the game media that is counted cumulatively every time the game is played falls below a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media And a means for generating a second special gaming state in which is set relatively high.
[12] 複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技媒体の収支を遊技機ごとに累積的に計数する制 御装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機であって、 [12] A gaming machine connected via a communication line to a control device that cumulatively counts the balance of gaming media in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、  A role determining means for determining a role by lottery;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、前記通信回線を介して、その回の遊技における遊技媒体の 収支を遊技機の識別情報とともに、前記制御装置に送信する手段と、  Means for transmitting the balance of game media in the game of the time, together with the identification information of the gaming machine, to the control device via the communication line each time a game is performed;
前記遊技機の識別情報とその回における遊技媒体の収支とに基づいて前記制御装 置によって累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、前記遊技媒体の収支との比較 対象となる設定値に達したときに前記制御装置力 送信される指令信号を受信する 手段と、  Based on the identification information of the gaming machine and the balance of game media at that time, the balance of the game media that is cumulatively counted by the control device reaches a set value to be compared with the balance of the game media. Means for receiving a command signal transmitted when said controller power is
前記指令信号に基づいて、前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的 に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と Based on the command signal, the probability of winning the special combination by the lottery is relatively Means for generating a second special gaming state set at a high level
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[13] 抽選により役を決定する役決定手段と、 [13] A role determining means for determining a role by lottery,
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させる手段と、  Means for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player when the determined combination is a special combination;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技媒体の収支を累積的に計数する手段と、  Means for cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played;
前記遊技媒体の収支が、前記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象として定められた設定 値以下になった力否かを判定する手段と、  Means for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium is equal to or less than a set value determined as a comparison target with the balance of the game medium;
遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になったと判定したとき、前記抽選により前記特別の 役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段と を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  And a means for generating a second special gaming state in which, when it is determined that the balance of gaming media has become equal to or less than a set value, the probability of winning the special combination by the lottery is set relatively high. A gaming machine.
[14] 前記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選したとき、前 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる手段 [14] Means for terminating the second special gaming state when the special combination is won by the lottery during the occurrence of the second special gaming state
を備えたことを特徴とする請求項 11〜 13の 、ずれか 1に記載の遊技機。  The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:
[15] 1回の遊技に対して所定の上限値まで遊技媒体の投入を受け入れることが可能な受 入手段を備え、 [15] With a receiving means capable of accepting the input of game media up to a predetermined upper limit for one game,
前記第 2特別遊技状態を発生させる手段は、前記遊技媒体の収支が前記設定値以 下になつたとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数が前記上限値であった場 合に、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させることを特徴とする請求項 11〜13のいずれか 1 に記載の遊技機。  The means for generating the second special game state is the first special game state, when the balance of the game media falls below the set value, and the number of game media inserted for that game is the upper limit value. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 11 to 13, wherein two special gaming states are generated.
[16] 演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、 [16] A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
前記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、  A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、前記遊技媒体の収 支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったとき、前記抽選プログラムを実行すること により前記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を 発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。 The balance of game media that is cumulatively counted each time a game is played is the amount of game media collected. A program for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special combination is set relatively high by executing the lottery program when the value is equal to or less than a set value to be compared with the branch A game machine that executes a process of reading out and executing the program from the storage device.
[17] 演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備え、複数の遊技機の夫々における遊技媒体の収支 を遊技機ごとに累積的に計数する制御装置と通信回線を介して接続される遊技機で あって、 [17] A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device and connected via a communication line to a controller that cumulatively counts the balance of gaming media in each of a plurality of gaming machines for each gaming machine,
前記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、  A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device;
決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、  When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、前記通信回線を介して、前記記憶装置に記憶された当該遊 技における遊技媒体の投入数及び払出数を遊技機の識別情報とともに、前記制御 装置に送信する処理と、  A process of transmitting the number of game media inserted and paid out in the game stored in the storage device together with the identification information of the gaming machine to the control device through the communication line every time a game is performed;
前記遊技機の識別情報と当該遊技における遊技媒体の投入数及び払出数とに基づ いて前記制御装置によって累積的に計数される遊技媒体の収支が、前記遊技媒体 の収支との比較対象となる設定値以下になったときに、前記制御装置から送信される 指令信号を受信する処理と、  The balance of the game media that is cumulatively counted by the control device based on the identification information of the gaming machine and the number of game media inserted and paid out in the game is to be compared with the balance of the game media. A process of receiving a command signal transmitted from the control device when a set value or less is reached;
前記指令信号に基づいて、前記抽選プログラムを実行することにより前記特別の役 に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプ ログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処理と  Based on the command signal, a program for generating a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special role is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is read from the storage device. Process to be executed
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  A game machine characterized by executing
[18] 演算処理装置及び記憶装置を備えた遊技機であって、 [18] A gaming machine comprising an arithmetic processing unit and a storage device,
前記演算処理装置は、  The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記記憶装置に記憶された抽選プログラムを実行することにより、予め定められた複 数種類の役の中から選択される 1つの役を決定する処理と、 決定された役が特別の役であるとき、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態である第 1特別 遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する 処理と、 A process of determining one combination selected from a plurality of predetermined combinations by executing a lottery program stored in the storage device; When the determined combination is a special combination, a program for generating a first special gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous for the player, is read from the storage device and executed;
遊技が行われるごとに、遊技媒体の収支を累積的に計数する処理と、  A process of cumulatively counting the balance of game media each time a game is played,
遊技媒体の収支が、前記遊技媒体の収支との比較対象として定められた設定値以 下になつたか否かを判定する処理と、  A process for determining whether or not the balance of the game medium is equal to or less than a set value determined as a comparison target with the balance of the game medium;
遊技媒体の収支が設定値以下になったと判定したとき、前記抽選プログラムを実行 することにより前記特別の役に当選する確率が相対的に高く設定された第 2特別遊 技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを、前記記憶装置から読み出して実行する処 理と  When it is determined that the balance of gaming media has become equal to or less than a set value, a second special gaming state in which the probability of winning the special combination is set relatively high by executing the lottery program is generated. Processing for reading and executing the program from the storage device;
を実行することを特徴とする遊技機。  A game machine characterized by executing
[19] 前記演算処理装置は、  [19] The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記第 2特別遊技状態の発生中に前記抽選により前記特別の役に当選したとき、前 記第 2特別遊技状態を終了させる処理を実行することを特徴とする請求項 16〜18の いずれか 1に記載の遊技機。  19. The process for ending the second special gaming state is executed when the special combination is won by the lottery while the second special gaming state is occurring. 18. The gaming machine described in 1.
[20] 前記演算処理装置は、  [20] The arithmetic processing unit includes:
前記遊技媒体の収支が前記設定値以下になったとき、その回の遊技に対する遊技 媒体の投入数が、予め定められた 1回の遊技に対する遊技媒体の投入数の上限値 であった場合、第 2特別遊技状態を発生させるためのプログラムを実行することを特 徴とする請求項 16〜18のいずれか 1に記載の遊技機。  When the balance of the game media is equal to or less than the set value, the number of game media input for that game is a predetermined upper limit value of the number of game media input for one game. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 16 to 18, characterized in that a program for generating two special gaming states is executed.
[21] 所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手段と、 遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、前記抽選の当選確率を高く設定する手段と、 前記当選確率が高く設定されているときに前記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段と  [21] means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when winning a predetermined lottery, means for setting a winning probability of the lottery according to the number of games played by the player, and the winning Means for returning the winning probability when the probability is set to be high when the lottery is won.
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[22] 所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手段と、 遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、前記抽選の当選確率を高く設定する手段と、 前記当選確率が高く設定されているときに前記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段と [22] means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won, means for setting a winning probability of the lottery according to a balance of a player's game medium, and the winning The chance to win the lottery when the probability is set high, Means to restore the winning probability
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
[23] 所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させるステップ と、  [23] generating an advantageous gaming state for a player when winning a predetermined lottery;
遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて、前記抽選の当選確率を高く設定するステップと 前記当選確率が高く設定されているときに前記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻すステップと  Depending on the number of games played by the player, the winning probability of the lottery is set high, and the winning probability is restored when the winning probability is set when the winning probability is set high. Step and
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技制御方法。  A game control method comprising:
[24] 所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させるステップ と、 [24] generating a gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is won;
遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて、前記抽選の当選確率を高く設定するステップと 前記当選確率が高く設定されているときに前記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻すステップと  In accordance with the player's balance of game media, the step of setting the winning probability of the lottery to be high and the winning probability is returned to the original when the winning probability is set to be high. Step and
を備えたことを特徴とする遊技制御方法。  A game control method comprising:
[25] 遊技機と制御装置とを備えた制御システムであって、 [25] A control system comprising a gaming machine and a control device,
前記制御装置は、  The controller is
前記遊技機において遊技者が行った遊技回数に応じて前記遊技機に信号を送信す る手段を備え、  Means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine according to the number of games played by the player in the gaming machine;
前記遊技機は、  The gaming machine is
所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手段と、 前記制御装置から受信した前記信号に基づいて、前記抽選の当選確率を高く設定 する手段と、  Means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won, and means for setting a winning probability of the lottery based on the signal received from the control device;
前記当選確率が高く設定されているときに前記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段とを備えたことを特徴とする遊技システム。  A gaming system comprising: means for returning the winning probability when the winning is won when the winning probability is set high.
[26] 遊技機と制御装置とを備えた遊技システムであって、 [26] A gaming system comprising a gaming machine and a control device,
前記制御装置は、 前記遊技機における遊技者の遊技媒体の収支に応じて前記遊技機に信号を送信 する手段を備え、 The controller is Means for transmitting a signal to the gaming machine according to the balance of game media of the player in the gaming machine;
前記遊技機は、 The gaming machine is
所定の抽選に当選したときに、遊技者にとって有利な遊技状態を発生させる手段と、 前記制御装置から受信した前記信号に基づいて、前記抽選の当選確率を高く設定 する手段と、 Means for generating a gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined lottery is won, and means for setting the winning probability of the lottery high based on the signal received from the control device;
前記当選確率が高く設定されているときに前記抽選に当選したことを契機として、該 当選確率を元に戻す手段とを備えたことを特徴とする遊技システム。 A gaming system comprising: means for returning the winning probability when the winning is won when the winning probability is set high.
PCT/JP2005/015810 2005-08-30 2005-08-30 Game machine, game control method, and game system WO2007026404A1 (en)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2007533077A JPWO2007026404A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2005-08-30 Game machine, game control method, and game system
PCT/JP2005/015810 WO2007026404A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2005-08-30 Game machine, game control method, and game system
US11/262,780 US20070060280A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2005-11-01 Gaming machine, game control method and game system
EP06100860A EP1760674A3 (en) 2005-08-30 2006-01-25 Gaming machine, game control method and game system
AU2006200433A AU2006200433A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2006-02-01 Gaming machine, game control method and game system
ZA200601142A ZA200601142B (en) 2005-08-30 2006-02-08 Gaming machine, game control method and game system
EA200600754A EA010953B1 (en) 2005-08-30 2006-05-10 Gaming machine, game control method, amd game system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2005/015810 WO2007026404A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2005-08-30 Game machine, game control method, and game system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007026404A1 true WO2007026404A1 (en) 2007-03-08

Family

ID=37808508

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2005/015810 WO2007026404A1 (en) 2005-08-30 2005-08-30 Game machine, game control method, and game system

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US20070060280A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1760674A3 (en)
JP (1) JPWO2007026404A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2006200433A1 (en)
EA (1) EA010953B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2007026404A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200601142B (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009099028A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-13 Konami Digital Entertainment Co., Ltd. Game system provided with jackpot drawing device
JP2011004782A (en) * 2009-06-23 2011-01-13 Namco Bandai Games Inc Server device and game system
US8398478B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2013-03-19 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine capable of awarding payout based on the number of games played and playing method thereof
US8414378B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2013-04-09 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine and control method thereof
US8622804B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2014-01-07 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine which is executable rescue process in response to insurance bet and gaming method thereof

Families Citing this family (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8062118B2 (en) 2001-10-02 2011-11-22 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
US8033907B2 (en) 2001-10-02 2011-10-11 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
US7985131B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2011-07-26 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
US8083580B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2011-12-27 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
US7887410B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2011-02-15 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine
US8083579B2 (en) 2001-10-02 2011-12-27 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
US8021225B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2011-09-20 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine
JP2003111888A (en) 2001-10-02 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game managing method
US8025563B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2011-09-27 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine
JP2003111889A (en) 2001-10-02 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game managing method
US20080318657A2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2008-12-25 Aruze Corporation Gaming machine
US7972208B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2011-07-05 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
US20080214275A1 (en) * 2001-10-02 2008-09-04 Aruze Corp. Slot machine and control method of game
US20080064473A1 (en) * 2001-10-02 2008-03-13 Aruze Corp. Slot machine and control method of game
US8371926B2 (en) * 2001-10-02 2013-02-12 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
JP2003111890A (en) * 2001-10-05 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game managing method and game machine
US8342936B2 (en) 2001-10-02 2013-01-01 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine and control method of game
JP2003117053A (en) * 2001-10-12 2003-04-22 Aruze Corp Game server, game managing method and game machine
JP2003111897A (en) * 2001-10-09 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine, game managing server and game managing method
JP2003126343A (en) * 2001-10-22 2003-05-07 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game managing method
US7549959B2 (en) * 2007-05-03 2009-06-23 The General Electric Company Stimulation arrangement for measurement of physiological signal reactivity
JP4742108B2 (en) * 2008-02-05 2011-08-10 株式会社コナミデジタルエンタテインメント Game system, jackpot lottery device and game device constituting the same
US8696434B2 (en) * 2008-03-24 2014-04-15 Universal Entertainment Corporation Slot machine capable of keeping constant order or constant tempo of stopping rotation reels
US20110105210A1 (en) * 2009-11-05 2011-05-05 Chi We Chim Method of gaming, a game controller and a gaming system

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000005380A (en) * 1998-06-24 2000-01-11 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2000354685A (en) * 1999-06-14 2000-12-26 Konami Co Ltd Game system, game controlling method, and computer- readable storage medium
JP2003111890A (en) * 2001-10-05 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game managing method and game machine
JP2003135653A (en) * 2001-11-02 2003-05-13 Daito Giken:Kk Game stand

Family Cites Families (67)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4283709A (en) * 1980-01-29 1981-08-11 Summit Systems, Inc. (Interscience Systems) Cash accounting and surveillance system for games
JPS60106479A (en) * 1983-11-14 1985-06-11 株式会社ユニバーサル Throttle machine
US4837728A (en) * 1984-01-25 1989-06-06 Igt Multiple progressive gaming system that freezes payouts at start of game
JPH0538775Y2 (en) * 1985-01-11 1993-09-30
US4624459A (en) * 1985-09-12 1986-11-25 Bally Manufacturing Corporation Gaming device having random multiple payouts
DE3778704D1 (en) * 1986-08-12 1992-06-04 Denis Coste PLOW WITH SYMMETRIC BODIES.
JP2719450B2 (en) * 1991-01-28 1998-02-25 ユニバーサル販売株式会社 Slot machine
JP2719462B2 (en) * 1991-06-20 1998-02-25 ユニバーサル販売株式会社 Slot machine
US5280909A (en) * 1992-02-06 1994-01-25 Mikohn, Inc. Gaming system with progressive jackpot
AU669161B2 (en) * 1992-03-10 1996-05-30 Kabushiki Kaisha Ace Denken Playing device having playing display screen
US5770533A (en) * 1994-05-02 1998-06-23 Franchi; John Franco Open architecture casino operating system
US5655961A (en) * 1994-10-12 1997-08-12 Acres Gaming, Inc. Method for operating networked gaming devices
US5611730A (en) * 1995-04-25 1997-03-18 Casino Data Systems Progressive gaming system tailored for use in multiple remote sites: apparatus and method
JPH09687A (en) * 1995-06-23 1997-01-07 Sammy Ind Co Ltd Image game machine
US5639088A (en) * 1995-08-16 1997-06-17 United Games, Inc. Multiple events award system
US5695402A (en) * 1996-04-10 1997-12-09 Stupak; Bob Game of chance
US5761647A (en) * 1996-05-24 1998-06-02 Harrah's Operating Company, Inc. National customer recognition system and method
DE19624321A1 (en) * 1996-06-18 1998-01-02 Atronic Casino Technology Dist Procedure for determining a proportional jackpot profit
ATE232001T1 (en) * 1996-11-04 2003-02-15 Marvin A Ornstein ELECTRONIC GAME SYSTEM
US5910048A (en) * 1996-11-29 1999-06-08 Feinberg; Isadore Loss limit method for slot machines
US6012983A (en) * 1996-12-30 2000-01-11 Walker Asset Management Limited Partnership Automated play gaming device
US6001016A (en) * 1996-12-31 1999-12-14 Walker Asset Management Limited Partnership Remote gaming device
US6234896B1 (en) * 1997-04-11 2001-05-22 Walker Digital, Llc Slot driven video story
AUPO910297A0 (en) * 1997-09-10 1997-10-02 Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd Slot machine game - progressive jackpot with decrementing jackpot
US6173955B1 (en) * 1998-12-22 2001-01-16 Mikohn Gaming Corporation Poker dice casino game method of play
JP4275209B2 (en) * 1998-01-16 2009-06-10 株式会社エース電研 Gift management system
WO1999045509A1 (en) * 1998-03-06 1999-09-10 Mikohn Gaming Corporation Gaming machines with bonusing
US6168522B1 (en) * 1998-03-31 2001-01-02 Walker Digital, Llc Method and apparatus for operating a gaming device to dispense a specified amount
US6358149B1 (en) * 1998-09-11 2002-03-19 Acres Gaming Incorporated Dynamic threshold for pool-based bonus promotions in electronic gaming systems
US6454649B1 (en) * 1998-10-05 2002-09-24 International Game Technology Gaming device and method using programmable display switch
US6273820B1 (en) * 1999-02-04 2001-08-14 Haste, Iii Thomas E. Virtual player gaming method
US6270409B1 (en) * 1999-02-09 2001-08-07 Brian Shuster Method and apparatus for gaming
US6358147B1 (en) * 1999-06-23 2002-03-19 Wms Gaming Inc. Gaming machine with multiple payoff modes and award presentation schemes
JP2001149524A (en) * 1999-09-17 2001-06-05 Aruze Corp Game device and computer readable medium for recording game program
US20030036418A1 (en) * 2000-02-22 2003-02-20 Seelig Jerald C. Bonus gaming system and method
US6932707B2 (en) * 2000-02-24 2005-08-23 Labtronix Concept Inc. Method of choosing and distributing enhanced odds
DE10049444B4 (en) * 2000-05-11 2007-04-26 Nsm-Löwen Entertainment Gmbh Method of operating a coin-operated entertainment device
US6439995B1 (en) * 2000-09-07 2002-08-27 Igt Gaming device having a bonus scheme with multiple selection groups
US6461241B1 (en) * 2000-10-12 2002-10-08 Igt Gaming device having a primary game scheme involving a symbol generator and secondary award triggering games
US6604333B1 (en) * 2000-11-28 2003-08-12 Tapco International Corporation Plastic window assembly
US6394902B1 (en) * 2001-04-18 2002-05-28 Igt Gaming device having different sets of primary and secondary reel symbols
JP2003111889A (en) * 2001-10-02 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game managing method
JP2003117053A (en) * 2001-10-12 2003-04-22 Aruze Corp Game server, game managing method and game machine
JP2003111888A (en) * 2001-10-02 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game managing method
JP2003111897A (en) * 2001-10-09 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine, game managing server and game managing method
JP2003117070A (en) * 2001-10-17 2003-04-22 Aruze Corp Game machine, game server and game management method
JP2003117072A (en) * 2001-10-17 2003-04-22 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game management method
JP2003126343A (en) * 2001-10-22 2003-05-07 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine and game managing method
JP2003190585A (en) * 2001-12-26 2003-07-08 Aruze Corp Game server, game machine, and method of game management
JP4201514B2 (en) * 2002-03-12 2008-12-24 アルゼ株式会社 Game machine
JP2003325761A (en) * 2002-05-17 2003-11-18 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2004089610A (en) * 2002-09-04 2004-03-25 Aruze Corp Game machine, pachinko game program, and server
JP2005034622A (en) * 2003-06-24 2005-02-10 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2005052572A (en) * 2003-08-07 2005-03-03 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2005066182A (en) * 2003-08-27 2005-03-17 Abilit Corp Slot machine and game control method
JP2005080861A (en) * 2003-09-08 2005-03-31 Aruze Corp Game machine and game system
US7867077B2 (en) * 2003-09-10 2011-01-11 Igt Gaming device having bonus game dependent upon variable wager component selection
JP2005087437A (en) * 2003-09-17 2005-04-07 Sanyo Product Co Ltd Game machine
JP2004000801A (en) * 2003-09-26 2004-01-08 Olympia:Kk Slot machine
ZA200410017B (en) * 2003-12-10 2005-08-31 Universal Entertainment Corp Gaming machine and control method of gaming machine
CA2487575C (en) * 2003-12-10 2010-10-05 Wms Gaming Inc. Gaming machine having a manual reel set-up feature
JP2005192660A (en) * 2003-12-26 2005-07-21 Heiwa Corp Game machine
JP2005192927A (en) * 2004-01-09 2005-07-21 Snk Playmore Corp Slot machine, control method of slot machine and control program of slot machine
JP2005211476A (en) * 2004-01-30 2005-08-11 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2005224512A (en) * 2004-02-16 2005-08-25 Takeya Co Ltd Game machine
JP2005224511A (en) * 2004-02-16 2005-08-25 Takeya Co Ltd Game machine
JP2004223289A (en) * 2004-05-07 2004-08-12 Aruze Corp Game machine

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000005380A (en) * 1998-06-24 2000-01-11 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2000354685A (en) * 1999-06-14 2000-12-26 Konami Co Ltd Game system, game controlling method, and computer- readable storage medium
JP2003111890A (en) * 2001-10-05 2003-04-15 Aruze Corp Game server, game managing method and game machine
JP2003135653A (en) * 2001-11-02 2003-05-13 Daito Giken:Kk Game stand

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009099028A1 (en) * 2008-02-04 2009-08-13 Konami Digital Entertainment Co., Ltd. Game system provided with jackpot drawing device
CN101909710A (en) * 2008-02-04 2010-12-08 科乐美数码娱乐株式会社 Game system provided with jackpot drawing device
US8491379B2 (en) 2008-02-04 2013-07-23 Konami Digital Entertainment Co., Ltd. Game system including drawing machine for jackpot game
US8398478B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2013-03-19 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine capable of awarding payout based on the number of games played and playing method thereof
US8414378B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2013-04-09 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine and control method thereof
US8622804B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2014-01-07 Universal Entertainment Corporation Gaming machine which is executable rescue process in response to insurance bet and gaming method thereof
JP2011004782A (en) * 2009-06-23 2011-01-13 Namco Bandai Games Inc Server device and game system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1760674A2 (en) 2007-03-07
EP1760674A3 (en) 2007-09-05
AU2006200433A1 (en) 2007-03-15
ZA200601142B (en) 2007-04-25
US20070060280A1 (en) 2007-03-15
EA200600754A1 (en) 2007-04-27
EA010953B1 (en) 2008-12-30
JPWO2007026404A1 (en) 2009-03-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2007026404A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
US7980944B2 (en) Gaming machine, game control method and game system
WO2007026407A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
WO2007026396A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
WO2007026400A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
EP1764755A1 (en) Gaming machine, game control method and game system
WO2007026406A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
US20070105622A1 (en) Gaming machine, game control method and game system
WO2007026401A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
WO2007026399A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
JP2009078120A (en) Slot machine which pays out prescribed number of credits when frequency of game reaches specified value
WO2007026403A1 (en) Game machine, game control method, and game system
US20070105621A1 (en) Gaming machine, game control method and game system
AU2007221932A1 (en) Gaming machine, playing method thereof and gaming system
JP5532282B2 (en) Slot machine and game control method
JP5390074B2 (en) Slot machine and game control method
JP2007082695A (en) Game machine
EP1764756A1 (en) Gaming machine, game control method and game system
JP2007325929A (en) Slot machine and its play method
JP2008229020A (en) Game machine
EP1785958A1 (en) Gaming machine, game control method and game system
JP2008259829A (en) Gaming machine and control method of game
JP2008229042A (en) Slot machine and control method for game
JP2008229018A (en) Game machine
JP2008229035A (en) Slot machine and control method for game

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2006/01142

Country of ref document: ZA

Ref document number: 200601142

Country of ref document: ZA

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2007533077

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12008500476

Country of ref document: PH

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE